Document:

Exhibit 10.3

 Exhibit 10.3 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 401(K) PLAN 

 PROFILE BANK, FSB 401(K) PLAN 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
  

							
	 	 	 	  	 	  	Page
	 I.
	 	 PLAN SPECIFICATIONS
	  	I-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Name.
	  	I-1
		 	B.	  	 Exclusive Benefit.
	  	I-1
		 	C.	  	 Effective Date.
	  	I-1
		 	D.	  	 Plan Year.
	  	I-2
		 	E.	  	 Limitation Year.
	  	I-2
		
	 ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION
	  	I-2
				
		 	 F.
	  	 Eligible Employee.
	  	I-2
		 	G.	  	 Entry Date.
	  	I-3
		
	 CONTRIBUTIONS
	  	I-3
				
		 	 H.
	  	 Types of Employer Contributions.
	  	I-3
		 	I.	  	 Reserved.
	  	I-4
		 	J.	  	 Required Minimum Benefits.
	  	I-4
		 	K.	  	 Compensation.
	  	I-5
		 	L.	  	 Highly Compensated Employees and Current or Prior Testing Methods.
	  	I-5
		
	 ALLOCATIONS TO CONTRIBUTION ACCOUNTS
	  	I-6
				
		 	 M.
	  	 Allocation of Employer Contributions.
	  	I-6
		 	N.	  	 Excess Compensation.
	  	I-6
		 	O.	  	 Participant Forfeitures.
	  	I-7
		 	P.	  	 Allocation Requirements – Last Day Employment and Service Requirements.
	  	I-7
		 	Q.	  	 Allocation of Excess Annual Additions.
	  	I-7
		 	R.	  	 Adjustment to the Rule of 1.0.
	  	I-7

  

 -i- 

							
		 	S.	  	 Employee After-Tax Contributions.
	  	I-8
		 	T.	  	 Rollover Contributions and Transferred Benefits.
	  	I-8
		 	U.	  	 Normal Retirement Age
	  	I-8
		
	 VESTING
	  	I-8
				
		 	V.	  	 Vesting.
	  	I-8
		 	W.	  	 Required Top-Heavy Minimum Vesting.
	  	I-9
		 	X.	  	 Years of Vesting Service.
	  	I-9
		 	Y.	  	 Years of Service – Break-in-Service.
	  	I-9
		 	Z.	  	 Vesting at Death or Total Disability.
	  	I-9
		
	 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS
	  	I-9
				
		 	AA.	  	 Participant Loans.
	  	I-9
		 	BB.	  	 Hardship Withdrawals.
	  	I-9
		 	CC.	  	 In-Service Distributions Other Than Hardship.
	  	I-10
		 	DD.	  	 Cash-Out Options.
	  	I-10
		 	EE.	  	 Time of Distribution Upon Employment Termination.
	  	I-11
		 	FF.	  	 Right to Defer Receipt of Benefits After Normal Retirement Age and Age 70 1/2.
	  	I-11
		 	GG.	  	 Accrued Benefits Not Subject to REACT Annuity Requirements.
	  	I-11
		 	HH.	  	 Alternate Forms of Benefits Payments.
	  	I-12
		 	II.	  	 Reserved.
	  	I-13
		 	JJ.	  	 Total Disability.
	  	I-13
		
	 MISCELLANEOUS
	  	I-13
				
		 	KK.	  	 Participant Directed Accounts.
	  	I-13
		 	LL.	  	 Valuation Date.
	  	I-13
		 	MM.	  	 Look-Back Year.
	  	I-13
		 	NN.	  	 Co-Trustees.
	  	I-13
		 	OO.	  	 Correction of Multiple Use.
	  	I-14
		 	PP.	  	 Model Amendment.
	  	I-14
			
	 II.
	 	DEFINITIONS	  	II-1
				
		 	A.	  	 Terms Defined In This Article II.
	  	II-1
		 	B.	  	 Terms Not Defined in Article I and II of this Plan.
	  	II-26
			
	 III.
	 	PARTICIPATION AND MEMBERSHIP	  	III-1
				
		 	A.	  	 Participation Date.
	  	III-1
		 	B.	  	 Leave of Absence.
	  	III-1

  

 -ii- 

							
		 	 C.
	  	 Enrollment.
	  	III-2
		 	 D.
	  	 Omission of Eligible Employee.
	  	III-2
		 	 E.
	  	 Inclusion of Ineligible Employee.
	  	III-2
			
	 IV.
	 	 EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS
	  	IV-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 In General.
	  	IV-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Special Make-up Contribution.
	  	IV-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Corrective Contributions.
	  	IV-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Profit Sharing and Retirement Savings (401(k)) Contributions.
	  	IV-1
		 	 E.
	  	 Actual Deferral Percentage Limitation.
	  	IV-2
		 	 F.
	  	 Safe Harbor Contributions.
	  	IV-4
		 	 G.
	  	 Simple 401(k) Plans.
	  	IV-7
		 	 H.
	  	 Limitation on Elective Deferrals.
	  	IV-8
		 	 I.
	  	 Reserved.
	  	IV-8
		 	 J.
	  	 Correction of Excess Contributions.
	  	IV-8
		 	 K.
	  	 Coordination of Excess Contributions with Excess Deferrals.
	  	IV-12
		 	 L.
	  	 Income Allowable to Excess Contribution.
	  	IV-12
		 	 M.
	  	 Correction of Excess Deferrals.
	  	IV-12
		 	 N.
	  	 Income Allowable to Excess Deferrals.
	  	IV-13
		 	 O.
	  	 Coordination of Excess Deferrals with Distribution or Recharacterization of Excess Contributions.
	  	IV-13
		 	 P.
	  	 Distribution of Amounts Attributed to Elective Contributions.
	  	IV-13
		 	 Q.
	  	 Hardship Withdrawals.
	  	IV-14
		 	 R.
	  	 Aggregation of Employer’s Plans.
	  	IV-16
			
	 V.
	 	 ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS
	  	V-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Maintenance of Accounts.
	  	V-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Valuation of Trust.
	  	V-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Allocation of Trust Earnings.
	  	V-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Allocation to Contribution Accounts.
	  	V-2
		 	 E.
	  	 Limitation on Allocation of Employer Contributions and Forfeitures.
	  	V-3
		 	 F.
	  	 Allocation Priorities if Limitations Exceeded.
	  	V-5
		 	 G.
	  	 Key Man Insurance Proceeds.
	  	V-5
			
	 VI.
	 	 VESTING AND BENEFIT ENTITLEMENT
	  	VI-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Vesting.
	  	VI-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Forfeitures.
	  	VI-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Re-Vesting in Forfeitures Upon Re-Employment.
	  	VI-3
		 	 D.
	  	 Limitation on Vesting Upon Re-Employment.
	  	VI-3
		 	 E.
	  	 Vesting Upon Change of Employment Status.
	  	VI-4

  

 -iii- 

							
		 	 F.
	  	 Vested Interest Not Distributed.
	  	VI-4
		 	 G.
	  	 Break-in-Service While Still Employed.
	  	VI-4
		 	 H.
	  	 Effect of Break-in-Service – Vested Participant.
	  	VI-4
		 	 I.
	  	 Reserved.
	  	VI-4
		 	 J.
	  	 Effect of Break-in-Service – Non-Vested Participant.
	  	VI-4
		 	 K.
	  	 Limitation on Right to Amend Vesting Schedule.
	  	VI-5
			
	 VII.
	 	 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS
	  	VII-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Definitions.
	  	VII-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Distribution With Annuity Option – Other Than Death.
	  	VII-3
		 	 C.
	  	 Distribution at Death.
	  	VII-10
		 	 D.
	  	 Transitional Rules.
	  	VII-13
		 	 E.
	  	 Non-Annuity Rules.
	  	VII-14
		 	 F.
	  	 Time of Distribution.
	  	VII-14
		 	 G.
	  	 Pre-TEFRA Designations.
	  	VII-14
		 	 H.
	  	 Loans to Participants.
	  	VII-15
		 	 I.
	  	 Reserved.
	  	VII-17
		 	 J.
	  	 Distributions to Incompetent Persons.
	  	VII-17
		 	 K.
	  	 Nonliability.
	  	VII-17
		 	 L.
	  	 Benefit Claims Procedure.
	  	VII-18
		 	 M.
	  	 Income Tax Withholding.
	  	VII-19
		 	 N.
	  	 Qualified Domestic Relations Orders.
	  	VII-19
		 	 O.
	  	 Overpayment of Vested Interest.
	  	VII-19
			
	 VIII.
	 	 TOP-HEAVY LIMITATIONS
	  	VIII-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Definitions.
	  	VIII-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Aggregation Groups.
	  	VIII-2
		 	 C.
	  	 60% Test – Special Rules.
	  	VIII-3
		 	 D.
	  	 Minimum Vesting Requirements.
	  	VIII-4
		 	 E.
	  	 Minimum Benefit Requirement.
	  	VIII-5
		 	 F.
	  	 Annual Section 415 Compensation.
	  	VIII-6
		 	 G.
	  	 Multiple Plans.
	  	VIII-7
			
	 IX.
	 	 DESIGNATED BENEFICIARIES
	  	IX-1
			
	 X.
	 	 CONTRIBUTIONS BY PARTICIPANTS
	  	X-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Employee After-Tax Contributions.
	  	X-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Rollover Contributions.
	  	X-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Separate Administration and Accounts for Participant Contributions.
	  	X-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Vesting.
	  	X-2

  

 -iv- 

							
		 	 E.
	  	 Withdrawal of Contributions.
	  	X-2
		 	 F.
	  	 Distribution of Rollover Contribution Accounts.
	  	X-2
		 	 G.
	  	 Limitations on Section 401(m) Contributions.
	  	X-2
		 	 H.
	  	 Correction of Excess Aggregate Contributions.
	  	X-5
		 	 I.
	  	 Reserved.
	  	X-6
		 	 J.
	  	 Distribution of Income.
	  	X-6
		 	 K.
	  	 Coordination with Section 401(a)(4) of the Code.
	  	X-7
		 	 L.
	  	 Additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions.
	  	X-7
		 	 M.
	  	 Correction of Excess Aggregate Contribution Prior to the Plan Year.
	  	X-9
		 	 N.
	  	 Coordination with Correction of Excess Contributions and Excess Deferrals.
	  	X-9
		 	 O.
	  	 Prevention of Multiple Use.
	  	X-9
		 	 P.
	  	 Aggregation Rules for Section 401(m) Contributions.
	  	X-11
			
	 XI.
	 	 LIFE INSURANCE POLICIES
	  	XI-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Investment and Ownership of Life Insurance Policies.
	  	XI-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Payment of Premiums.
	  	XI-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Accounting for Policies.
	  	XI-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Discrimination.
	  	XI-1
		 	 E.
	  	 Disposition Upon Retirement or Total Disability.
	  	XI-1
		 	 F.
	  	 Disposition Upon Other Separation From Service.
	  	XI-1
		 	 G.
	  	 Policy Loans.
	  	XI-2
		 	 H.
	  	 Insurer Not a Party.
	  	XI-3
		 	 I.
	  	 Reserved.
	  	XI-3
		 	 J.
	  	 Insurance Limitations.
	  	XI-3
			
	 XII.
	 	 TRUST
	  	XII-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Payment of Contributions.
	  	XII-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Participant Directed Accounts.
	  	XII-1
			
	 XIII.
	 	 THE ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
	  	XIII-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Committee Membership.
	  	XIII-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Named Fiduciary and Plan Administration.
	  	XIII-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Compensation.
	  	XIII-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Delegation of Duties.
	  	XIII-1
		 	 E.
	  	 Bonding of Fiduciaries.
	  	XIII-2
		 	 F.
	  	 Action By Committee Members.
	  	XIII-2

  

 -v- 

							
	 XIV.
	 	AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION; RETURN OF EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS; PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS	  	XIV-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Amendment.
	  	XIV-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Termination or Partial Termination or Complete Discontinuance of Contributions.
	  	XIV-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Return of Employer Contributions.
	  	XIV-2
		 	 D.
	  	 Procedure for Adoption and Withdrawal by Participating Employers.
	  	XIV-2
			
	 XV.
	 	 STANDARD OF CONDUCT OF FIDUCIARIES
	  	XV-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Fiduciaries.
	  	XV-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Fiduciary Duties.
	  	XV-1
			
	 XVI.
	 	 MERGERS, CONSOLIDATIONS AND TRANSFERS OF ASSETS
	  	XVI-1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Merger or Consolidation of the Plan.
	  	XVI-1
		 	 B.
	  	 Transfers From Other Qualified Plans – Rollovers.
	  	XVI-1
		 	 C.
	  	 Transfer To Eligible Retirement Plans.
	  	XVI-1
		 	 D.
	  	 Transfer or Merger of Money Purchase Pension Plan to this Plan.
	  	XVI-1
			
	 XVII.
	 	 MISCELLANEOUS
	  	1
				
		 	 A.
	  	 Limitation of Rights and Employment Relationship.
	  	1
		 	 B.
	  	 Payments to Missing Persons.
	  	1
		 	 C.
	  	 Spendthrift Provisions.
	  	1
		 	 D.
	  	 Indemnification.
	  	2
		 	 E.
	  	 Applicable Laws; Severability.
	  	2

  

 -vi- 

 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 401(k) PLAN 
 Amended and Restated 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB, a New Hampshire corporation (the “Employer”), has adopted this amended and restated Profit Sharing and Retirement Savings
Plan to allow its Employees who are eligible to participate in the Plan to share in the growth of the Employer in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth below, in order to (i) promote in the Employees an interest in the successful
operation of the Employer’s business and in the increased efficiency of their work; (ii) provide the participating Employees with benefits upon their retirement; and (iii) provide their Beneficiaries with death benefits. 

This Plan and Trust are intended to meet the requirements of Section 404(c) of ERISA and its regulations. 
 I. PLAN SPECIFICATIONS 
 A.
Name. 
 This Profit Sharing and Retirement Savings Plan shall be known as the “PROFILE BANK, FSB 401(k) PLAN.” 

B. Exclusive Benefit. 
 This Plan
shall be maintained for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries and is intended to qualify as a defined contribution plan under the appropriate provisions of ERISA and the Code. 
 C. Effective Date. 
 “Effective
Date” means 07/01/1995. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-1

 “Amended Effective Date” means 01/01, 2005, unless otherwise stated herein. 
 D. Plan Year. 
 “Plan Year”
means each 12 consecutive month period ending on 12/31. 
 E. Limitation Year. 
 “Limitation Year” means each 12 consecutive month period ending on 12/31. 
 ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION 
 F. Eligible Employee. 
 “Eligible Employee” means, with respect to any Plan Year, every Employee of the Employer who meets the following requirements: 
 1. Minimum Age: 
 He or she has
attained age 18. 
 2. Service: 
 For purposes of sharing in all other contributions, he or she has completed 1 Month and the attainment of the minimum age requirement. 
 3. Years of Service – Break-in-Service. 
 This Plan shall use the elapsed time method for crediting Years of Service
for eligibility purposes. 
 4. Service with the Predecessor Employer or Predecessor Plan. 
 Service with a Predecessor Employer is not applicable. 
 5. Subsequent Eligibility Computation Period. 
 “Subsequent Eligibility Computation Period”
means the 12 consecutive month period commencing on any anniversary of the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-2

 6. Class Exclusions. 
 None. 
 G. Entry Date. 
 “Entry Date” means the first day of each month coincident with or next following the day he or she becomes an Eligible Employee. 
 CONTRIBUTIONS 
 H. Types of
Employer Contributions. 
 1. Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 The Employer shall not make Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 2. Elective Contributions Without Safe Harbor Provisions. 
 Each Participant may elect, by completing
the appropriate forms acceptable to the Committee, to reduce and defer the receipt of up to 25% of his or her Compensation; provided, however, that a minimum deferral of 1% of Compensation shall apply. Commencing January 1, 2005,
notwithstanding the above, a Participant may elect on an annual basis and prior to receipt of any bonus, by completing the appropriate forms acceptable to the Committee, to reduce and defer the receipt of any amount from 0% up to 100% of his or her
bonus paid during a calendar year. In no event shall any Participant be permitted to make Elective Contributions in excess of the limitation on Elective Deferrals described in Paragraph H of Article IV. The Employer shall contribute the amount so
deferred subject to the limitations described in Articles IV and V, to the Plan. 
 3. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions.

 The Employer may make Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions. The Employer may contribute on behalf of all eligible Non-Highly
Compensated Participants eligible for an allocation, a contribution equal to the amount, if any, as necessary to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation and/or Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 The Employer may designate that portion of its Nonelective Employer Contributions made to the Trust for such Plan Year as Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contributions under Section 401(k) of the Code and/or as Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions under Section 401(m) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-3

 4. Matching Contributions. 
 The Employer may make Matching Contributions. 
 5. Qualified Matching Contributions. 
 The Employer shall not make Qualified Matching Contributions. 
 6. Safe Harbor Matching Contributions. 
 The Employer shall not make Safe Harbor Matching Contributions. 
 7. Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions.

 The Employer shall not make Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 8. Simple 401(k) Contributions. 
 The
Employer shall not make Simple 401(k) Contributions. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Required Minimum Benefits. 
 The
top-heavy minimum benefit shall be the lesser of three percent (3%) or the highest percentage allocated to any Key Employee of Section 415 Compensation. 
 If a Non-Key Employee participates in this Plan and another plan of the Employer included in a Top-heavy Group, the other plan shall provide the top-heavy minimum benefits. 
 Key Employees shall be entitled to top-heavy minimum benefits under this Plan. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-4

 K. Compensation. 
 “Compensation” means wages, not to exceed the Compensation Limitation, paid by the Employer to an Employee during a Plan Year, as defined in Section 3401(a) of the Code and all other payments of
Compensation to an Employee by the Employer (in the course of the Employer’s trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement (Form W-2) under Sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052 of the Code.
Compensation must be determined without regard to any rules under Section 3401(a) of the Code that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed, and further modified by the
following: 
 Modifications of Compensation 
 Including wages which are not currently includable in the Participant’s gross income by reason of the application of Sections 125, 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 403(b), 408(p)(2)(A)(i) and 457 of the Code.

 Excluding future bonuses from the definition of Compensation, if the Participant so elects. 
 L. Highly Compensated Employees and Current or Prior Testing Methods. 
 For purposes of identifying Highly Compensated Employees, the Employer has elected the following: 
 1. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, a Highly Compensated Employee shall be determined based upon the Look-Back Year. 
 2. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, a Highly Compensated Employee need not be a member of the Top-Paid Group. 
 3. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the determination of the Actual Deferral Percentage and the Average Contribution Percentage, if
applicable, for the group of Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees shall be based upon the current Plan Year data. However, for Plan Years beginning in 2005 the determination of Actual Deferral Percentage and the Average
Contribution Percentage, if applicable, for the group of Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees shall be based upon the preceding Plan Year data. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-5

 ALLOCATIONS TO CONTRIBUTION ACCOUNTS 
 M. Allocation of Employer Contributions. 
 Subject to the provisions of Articles IV, V and X: 
 1. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 Ratio of Compensation. Qualified Employer Nonelective Contributions for each Plan Year shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contribution Accounts in the proportion that each Non-Highly Compensated Eligible Participant’s Compensation bears to the Compensation of all such Non-Highly Compensated Eligible Participants for the Plan Year. 
 2. Matching Contributions. 
 Each
Participant shall receive an allocation of Matching Contributions as provided in the formula elected in Paragraph H of this Article I. 
 3.
Qualified Matching Contributions. 
 Not Applicable. 
 4. Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 Not Applicable. 
 5. Safe Harbor Matching Contributions 
 Not applicable. 
 6. Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions 
 Not applicable. 
 7. Simple 401(k)
Contributions 
 Not applicable. 
 N. Excess Compensation. 
 Not Applicable. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-6

 O. Participant Forfeitures. 
 1. Forfeitures shall be used to reduce Matching Contributions. 
 2. Forfeiture of a Participant’s nonvested Accounts shall occur at the end of the Plan Year in which such Participant receives a distribution of his or her Accounts, or a deemed distribution if he or she was not
vested; or if earlier, at the end of the Plan Year in which the Participant has incurred five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service. 
 A previously forfeited Account balance shall be restored first from forfeitures which occurred in the Plan Year in which the Account balance will be restored. If the amount of forfeitures in such Plan Year is not sufficient to restore such
previously forfeited Account balance, then such previously forfeited Account balance shall be restored from Nonelective Employer Contributions. 
 P. Allocation Requirements – Last Day Employment and Service Requirements. 
 1. Last Day Employment and Service
– Not Required. 
 Allocations of Elective Contributions, Matching Contributions and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions
shall be made to the appropriate Accounts of Eligible Participants during the Plan Year. 
 Q. Allocation of Excess Annual Additions.

 If an allocation to a Participant would result in an excess Annual Addition, such excess Annual Addition shall be held in suspense accounts
and applied to reduce Employer contributions for the next succeeding Limitation Year. 
 If the Employer maintains more than one
(1) defined contribution plan, the excess Annual Additions shall first be attributable to this Plan. 
 R. Adjustment to the Rule of
1.0. 
 If an adjustment under Section 415(e) of the Code is necessary to prevent the sum of the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and
the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction from exceeding 1.0 for a Limitation Year, the Annual Additions in the defined contribution plan shall be reduced first. 
 For Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1999, the preceding paragraph shall no longer apply. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-7

 S. Employee After-Tax Contributions. 
 Employee After-Tax Contributions are not allowed. 
 T. Rollover Contributions and Transferred Benefits. 
 Rollover Contributions are allowed. 
 Transferred Benefits are allowed. 
 U.
Normal Retirement Age. 
 Normal Retirement Age means the Participant’s 65th birthday. A Participant who continues in the employ
of the Employer after he or she attains Normal Retirement Age shall remain a Participant while so employed, and be entitled to all Plan benefits to the extent he or she would be entitled thereto if he or she had not yet attained Normal Retirement
Age, including allocation of any type of Employer contribution and forfeiture, if any. 
 VESTING 
 V. Vesting. 
 A Participant shall be
fully vested in his or her Elective Contribution and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution Account(s) at all times. 
 The Matching
Contribution Account of a Participant shall vest in him or her or as follows: 
  

					
	 Years of Vesting
Service
	  	 Vested Percentage

	 Less than
	 	 2
	  	    0%
		 	 2
	  	  20%
		 	 3
	  	  40%
		 	 4
	  	  60%
		 	 5
	  	  80%
		 	 6 or more
	  	100%

  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-8

 W. Required Top-Heavy Minimum Vesting. 
 If the Plan is a Top-heavy Plan, the 6-year graded vesting schedule set forth in Paragraph D.2 of Article VIII shall replace the vesting schedule adopted
in this Article I, unless the vesting schedule set forth in Paragraph V of this Article I provides for a faster rate of vesting during any relevant year. 
 X. Years of Vesting Service. 
 “Years of Vesting Service” means all of an Employee’s
Years of Service subject to the provisions of Article VI. 
 Y. Years of Service – Break-in-Service. 
 This Plan shall use the elapsed time method for crediting Years of Service for vesting purposes. 
 Z. Vesting at Death or Total Disability. 
 A Participant shall become fully vested at death. A Participant shall become fully vested at Total Disability. 
 DISTRIBUTION OF
BENEFITS 
 AA. Participant Loans. 
 Loans to Participants are available. Loans will be treated as directed investments of Participants’ Accounts. The $50,000 limit and 50% limit under Paragraph H of Article VII shall apply. Loans shall be repaid by
payroll deductions. Loans to Inactive Participants are not available. Loan repayments shall not be suspended by reason of Section 414(u) of the Code. 
 BB. Hardship Withdrawals. 
 Hardship withdrawals of Elective contributions and Matching contributions
shall be allowed. For these purposes, an “event of hardship” means: 
 Payment of medical expenses described in Section 213(d)
of the Code which are incurred by the Employee, the Employee’s Spouse, or any dependents of the Employee as defined in Section 152(d) of the Code or necessary for these persons to obtain medical care as described in Section 213(d) of
the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-9

 Purchase of a principal residence, but not including mortgage payments, by the Employee. 
 Payment of tuition, room and board, and related educational fees for the next 12 months of post-secondary education for the Employee, the Employee’s
Spouse, children or dependents. 
 The need to prevent eviction of the Employee from his or her principal residence or foreclosure on the
mortgage of the Employee’s principal residence. 
 CC. In-Service Distributions Other Than Hardship. 
 In-service distributions of a Participant’s Matching Contribution Account and Transferred Benefits Account not subject to Section 401(k) of the
Code or Paragraph D of Article XVI shall be allowed at the following times: 
 Attainment of age 59 1/2 or later 
 In-service distributions of a Participant’s Elective Contribution Account, Qualified
Nonelective Contribution Account and Transferred Benefits Account subject to only Section 401(k) of the Code shall be allowed at age 59 1/2 or later and upon Total Disability. 
 In-service distributions of a
Participant’s Rollover Contribution Account shall be allowed at any time. 
 DD. Cash-Out Options. 
 1. Effective for Plan Years beginning after August 5, 1997, the $3,500 involuntary cash-out distribution limit shall be increased to $5,000.

 2. An immediate forfeiture of a partial cash-out as provided in Paragraph B.4 of Article VI shall apply. 
 3. If a Participant is rehired prior to five (5) consecutive one year Breaks-in-Service, he or she shall be required to repay the Plan the amounts
previously distributed to the Participant for the Participant’s non-vested Accrued Benefits to be restored. 
 4. The alternative
separate account formula X=P(AB + (RxD)) – (RxD) as stated in Paragraph C of Article VI shall not apply. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-10

 EE. Time of Distribution Upon Employment Termination. 
 Distributions of vested Accounts to Participants upon employment termination prior to Normal Retirement Age shall be made as soon as administratively
feasible after employment termination date. 
 FF. Right to Defer Receipt of
Benefits After Normal Retirement Age and Age 70 1/2. 
 1. Upon separation from service, a Participant shall have the right to defer receipt of benefits after Normal
Retirement Age or age 62, if later. 
 2. The required beginning date for minimum
required distributions for a non-5%-Owner is the April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which such Participant attains age 70 1/2 or the calendar year in which such Participant retires. 
 (a) Effective 01/01/2005, any non-5%-Owner who attains age 70 1
/2, is not currently required to receive minimum required distributions, and who is still employed by the Employer may elect to defer receiving
minimum required distributions until the calendar year following retirement. Such election must be made by the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attained age 70 1
/2. 
 Options That Eliminate the Right to Receive Post Age 70 1/2 Distributions 
 (b) The preretirement age 70 1/2 distribution option is only eliminated with respect to non-5%-Owners who attain age 70 1/2 in or after a calendar year that begins after the later of December 31, 1998, or the adoption date of an
amendment doing so. 
 GG. Accrued Benefits Not Subject to REACT Annuity Requirements. 
 Participants’ Accrued Benefits other than Transferred Benefits shall not be subject to the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and Qualified
Preretirement Survivor Annuity requirements of REACT as provided in Paragraphs A, B and C of Article VII. The survivor portion of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in regard to the Participant’s Transferred Benefits shall equal 50%. The
Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity in regard to the Participant’s Transferred Benefits shall equal 50% of the actuarial equivalent of the sum of the Participant’s Transferred Benefits and any other death benefits attributable to such
Transferred Benefits. The one-year marriage requirement shall apply to a Surviving Spouse in regard to the Preretirement death benefit or the Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity, if applicable. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-11

 HH. Alternate Forms of Benefits Payments. 
 The following alternate forms of benefit payment are available: 
 Single Sum. The payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a single sum in cash. 
 Effective as adopted below, this Paragraph HH and Paragraph B.3 of Article VII are modified to eliminate the following optional forms of benefit payments. 
 Annuity. The payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit, variable or fixed, in a series of monthly/annual payments provided to such Participant for his or her life or for the joint lives of the
Participant and his or her Designated Beneficiary. An annuity may not include a period certain. 
 Installments. The payment of the
Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a series of installments payable monthly quarterly semi-annually or annually. 
 Combination. Any combination of the methods described above. 
 1. The elimination of the above optional form[s] of benefit
payment[s] shall not apply to a Participant with respect to any distribution with an Annuity Starting Date that is earlier than the earlier of: 
 (a) The 90th day after the date the Participant has been furnished a summary that reflects the elimination of the above form of benefit and that satisfies the requirements of 29 CFR 2520.104b-3 (relating to summary plan material
modifications) for pension plans; or 
 (b) first day of the second Plan Year following the Plan Year in which this amendment and restatement
are adopted. 
 2. Any elimination of an annuity form of payment will not be effective if the Participant’s Account is: 
 (a) Subject to the minimum funding requirements of Section 412 of the Code; or 
 (b) The Participant’s Account is a Transferred Benefits Account from a plan that was required to provide for a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity
because such plan was subject to Section 412 of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-12

 II. Reserved. 
 JJ. Total Disability. 
 Total and permanent disability. 
 MISCELLANEOUS 
 KK. Participant
Directed Accounts. 
 Each Participant shall be entitled to direct the investment of his or her Accrued Benefits in accordance with
Article XII. 
 LL. Valuation Date. 
 For Accounts that are self-directed by Participants, Valuation Date(s) shall mean the end of each “business” day unless the investment option or the per share value of a particular investment is not valued
daily. If the particular investment is not valued daily, then Valuation Date shall mean the date(s), upon which such investment is actually valued or any other date that the Committee designates. However, in no event shall a Valuation Date occur
less frequently than annually, with the last day of each Plan Year serving as a Valuation Date (or one of the Valuation Dates). 
 MM.
Look-Back Year. 
 “Look-Back Year” means, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the 12-month period
immediately preceding any relevant Plan Year. 
 “Look-Back Year” means, For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1997,
the 12-month period immediately preceding any relevant Plan Year. 
 NN. Co-Trustees. 
 If there is more than one (1) Trustee, any one of such Trustees shall have the right to make any decision, undertake any action or execute any
documents affecting this Trust without the approval of the remaining Trustees. Any directions to any person or organization shall be executed by any one of the co-Trustees. For purposes of this Plan and Trust, “directions” shall mean any
certification, notice, authorization, application or instruction of the Trustee. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-13

 OO. Correction of Multiple Use. 
 If a multiple use of the alternative limitations occurs with respect to this Plan or with respect to this Plan and one or more other plans or arrangements
maintained by the Employer: 
 1. Reduction shall be made to all Highly Compensated Employees in order to prevent such multiple use.

 2. The Actual Deferral Percentage shall be reduced. 
 PP. Model Amendment. 
 1. Paragraph K of Article I is modified to add the following as a modification
to Compensation: 
 For Plan Years beginning on and after January 1, 1998, Compensation shall include elective amounts that are not
includible in the gross income of the Employee under Section 125, 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h) or 403(b) of the Code. 
 2. Paragraph
A.76 of Article II is modified to add the following: 
 For Plan Years beginning on and after January 1, 1998, the definition of
Section 415 Compensation for purposes of this Plan shall also include elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of Section 132(f)(4) of the Code. This modification shall also apply to the
definition of compensation for purposes of Paragraphs A.30 and A.41 of Article II and Paragraphs A.2 and E of Article VIII. 
 3. Paragraph
E.1 of Article V is modified to add the following subparagraph (c): 
 (c) For Limitation Years beginning on and after January 1, 1998,
for purposes of applying the limitations described in this Paragraph E, Section 415 Compensation paid or made available during such Limitation Years shall include elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by
reason of Section 132(f)(4) of the Code. 
 4. Paragraph B.9 of Article VII is modified to add the following paragraph: 
 With respect to distributions under the Plan made for calendar years beginning on and after January 1, 2002, the Plan will apply the minimum
distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) of the Code in accordance with the regulations under 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-14

 
Section 401(a)(9) of the Code that were proposed on January 17, 2001, notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary. This amendment
shall continue in effect until the end of the last calendar year beginning before the effective date of final regulations under Section 401(a)(9) of the Code or such other date as may be specified in guidance published by the Internal Revenue
Service. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE I	  	 I-15

 II. DEFINITIONS 
 A. Terms Defined In This Article II. As used in this Plan, the following terms have the following meanings. 
 1. “Account(s)” means, where applicable, a Participant’s Nonelective Employer Contribution Account, Elective Contribution Account, Employee After-Tax Contribution Account, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution
Account, Matching Contribution Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account, Rollover Contribution Account, Safe Harbor Matching Contribution Account, Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contribution Account, Simple 401(k) Contribution Account
and/or Transferred Benefits Account. 
 2. “Accrued Benefit” means, where applicable at any date, the value of a
Participant’s Accounts. 
 3. “Actual Deferral Percentage” means with respect to (i) the group of Highly
Compensated Employees who are Eligible Participants; and (ii) the group of all other Eligible Participants, the average of the actual deferral ratios of each group, calculated separately for each Eligible Participant in each group, of the
amount of the Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions made on behalf of each Eligible Participant for the Plan Year divided by the Eligible Participant’s Compensation for the Plan Year. The actual deferral ratio of an Eligible Participant
who did not make or receive any Qualifying Section 401(k) Contribution is zero (0). 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31,
1988, the actual deferral ratio for each Eligible Participant shall be calculated to the nearest one-hundredth (.01) of one percent (1%). Unless otherwise elected in Paragraph K of Article I, Compensation includes Compensation received for the
entire Plan Year regardless of whether the Eligible Participant was a Participant for the entire Plan Year. 
 A Highly Compensated Employee
who is either a 5%-Owner or one (1) of the 10 most Highly Compensated Employees shall have his or her actual deferral ratio aggregated with other eligible Family Members to form one (1) actual deferral ratio as if there was one
(1) Highly Compensated Employee. The combined actual deferral ratio shall be determined by combining the Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions and Compensation of all eligible Family Members. Except as provided in the preceding sentence,
Family Members, with respect to such Highly Compensated Employees, shall be disregarded as separate Employees in determining the Actual Deferral Percentage for Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees and for Participants who are Highly
Compensated Employees. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-1

 If an Employee is required to be aggregated as a member of more than one (1) family group in a
plan, all Eligible Participants who are members of the family groups that include such Employee are aggregated as one (1) family group in accordance with the preceding paragraph. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the preceding two (2) paragraphs shall no longer apply. 
 4. “Anniversary Date” means the last day of the Plan Year. 
 5. “Annual Addition” means the amounts allocated to a Participant’s Accounts during any relevant Limitation Year that constitute:

 (a) Employer contributions; 
 (b) Employee contributions; 
 (c) Forfeitures; 
 (d) Excess Contributions and Excess Aggregate Contributions are Annual Additions whether or not corrected by distribution or recharacterization. Furthermore, Excess Deferrals are Annual Additions; provided, however,
that Excess Deferrals which are distributed in accordance with Section 1.402(1)-1(e)(2) or (3) of the Treasury Regulations are not Annual Additions. Additionally, Elective Deferrals which are returned pursuant to Section 415 of the
Code are not Annual Additions and are disregarded for purposes of Sections 401(k), 401(m)(2) and 402(g) of the Code; 
 (e) Amounts
allocated after March 31, 1984, to an individual medical account, as described in Section 415(l)(2) of the Code, which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the Employer; 
 (f) Amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued after December 31, 1985, in taxable years ending after such date, which are attributable to
post-retirement medical benefits, allocated to separate accounts of a Key Employee, as defined in Section 419A(d)(3) of the Code, under a welfare benefit fund, as defined in Section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer; and

 (g) Amounts allocated under a simplified employee pension plan pursuant to Section 408(k) of the Code. 
 Notwithstanding the above, Employee After-Tax Contributions not in excess of the greater of
(i) six percent (6%) of Section 415 Compensation or (ii) one-half ( 1/2) of the Employee After-Tax
Contributions shall not be considered as 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-2

 
Annual Additions for any Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987. Furthermore, Employer contributions or prior forfeited amounts which are used
to restore the non-vested portion of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit that was previously cashed-out and forfeited shall not be considered an Annual Addition. 
 6. “Average Contribution Percentage” means with respect to (i) the group of Highly Compensated Employees who are Eligible Participants; and (ii) the group of all other Eligible Participants,
the average of the contribution ratios of each group, calculated separately for each Eligible Participant in each group, of the amount of Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions made on behalf of each Eligible Participant for the Plan Year
divided by the Eligible Participant’s Compensation. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, the Average Contribution Percentage shall be calculated to the nearest one-hundredth (.01) of one percent (1%). The determination of
Compensation for an Eligible Participant during the Plan Year shall be made in the same manner as for the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. 
 A Highly Compensated Employee who is either a 5%-Owner or one (1) of the 10 most Highly Compensated Employees shall have his or her Contribution Percentage aggregated with other eligible Family Members to form one (1) Contribution
Percentage as if there was one (1) Highly Compensated Employee. The combined Contribution Percentage shall be determined by combining the Qualifying Section 401(m) Contribution and Compensation of all eligible Family Members. Except as
provided in the preceding sentence, Family Members, with respect to such Highly Compensated Employees, shall be disregarded as separate Employees in determining the Average Contribution Percentage for Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated
Employees and for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees. 
 If an Employee is required to be aggregated as a member of more than
one (1) family group in a plan, all Eligible Participants who are members of the family groups that include such Employee are aggregated as one (1) family group in accordance with the preceding paragraph. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the preceding two (2) paragraphs shall no longer apply. 
 7. “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Employer, if a corporation. If such corporation is later dissolved, Board continues to
mean such Board of Directors of the Employer if empowered to continue to act as a board in settling the affairs of the dissolved corporation under local law. If no such power exists, then in the case of a corporation that is dissolved, Board means
the Trustee of the Trust, until such time as a new employer adopts and sponsors the Plan or until all assets are distributed. If the Employer is not a corporation, Board means the managing partner(s) of a partnership, the manager of a limited
liability company, the trustee(s) of a trust, the sole proprietor of an unincorporated business or the elected or designated representative(s) of an unincorporated association. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-3

 8. “Break-in-Service” means that an Employee did not complete more than 500 Hours of
Service, or such lesser amount if elected in Article I, in the applicable Computation Period. For purposes of determining whether a Break-in-Service has occurred in a Computation Period, an Employee who is granted a Maternity or Paternity Leave of
Absence shall receive credit for eight (8) Hours of Service per day of such absence. To the extent provided in Paragraph A.46 of this Article II and Paragraph B of Article III, Leaves of Absence shall not cause a Break-in-Service. Unless
otherwise elected in Article I, if the Plan Year is less than 12 months, no Break-in-Service shall occur in such Plan Year. For purposes of the elapsed time method, Break-in-Service means a “One-Year Period of Severance.” 
 9. “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time. 
 10. “Committee” means the administrative committee appointed by the Sponsoring Employer’s Board. 
 11. “Compensation Limitation” means the limitation imposed by Section 401(a)(17) of the Code, as described below. 
 (a) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988 and before January 1, 1994, Compensation shall not exceed $200,000 as adjusted after 1989
by the Secretary of the Treasury at the same time and in the same manner as adjusted under Section 415(d) of the Code, except that such adjustment for a calendar year shall take effect on the first day of the Plan Year beginning in such
calendar year. 
 (b) For Plan Years beginning on and after January 1, 1994, the annual Compensation of each Employee taken into
account under the Plan shall not exceed $150,000. The $150,000 Compensation Limitation shall be adjusted by the Secretary annually at the same time and in the same manner as adjusted under Section 415(d) of the Code; except that the base period
shall be the calendar quarter beginning October 1, 1993, and any increase which is not a multiple of $10,000 shall be rounded to the next lowest multiple of $10,000. The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to any
period, not exceeding 12 months, over which Compensation is determined (determination period) beginning in such calendar year. 
 If a
determination period is less than 12 months, the Compensation Limitation described in the preceding subparagraphs (a) and (b) above will by multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the determination
period, and the denominator of which is 12. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-4

 12. “Contribution Percentage” means the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the
Qualifying Section 401(m) contributions under the Plan on behalf of the Eligible Participant for the Plan Year to the Eligible Participant’s Compensation for the Plan Year. 
 13. “Controlled Group” means the Employer and all members of its controlled or affiliated group of trades or businesses whether or not
incorporated (including an affiliated service group) as defined in Section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code. For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1997, if the Employer is an Unincorporated Entity, then Controlled Group
shall be as defined in Section 401(d)(1) of the Code; provided, however, that any member of a Controlled Group shall be disregarded for all purposes under the Plan for any period when such member was not a member of the Controlled Group unless
expressly provided to the contrary herein. 
 14. “Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation” means $90,000, as adjusted each
January 1 by Section 415(d) of the Code for years beginning after December 31, 1987. 
 15. “Defined Benefit Plan
Fraction” means a fraction, the numerator of which is the projected annual benefit of a Participant under the Plan and any other defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer or its Controlled Group, whether or not terminated, and the
denominator of which is the lesser of: 
 (a) 1.25 multiplied by the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation in effect for such Limitation Year; or

 (b) 1.4 multiplied by the Participant’s average Section 415 Compensation for his or her highest three (3) consecutive
years including such Limitation Year, determined under Section 415(b)(1)(B) of the Code. 
 Notwithstanding the above, if an Employee
was a Participant as of the first day of the first Limitation Year beginning after December 31, 1986, in one (1) or more defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer which were in existence on May 6, 1986, the denominator of the
Defined Benefit Plan Fraction will not be less than 125% of the sum of the annual benefits of such Plans which the Participant had accrued as of the close of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987, disregarding any changes in
the terms and conditions of the Plan after May 5, 1986. The preceding sentence applies only if the defined benefit plans individually and in the aggregate satisfy the requirements of Section 415 of the Code for all Limitation Years
beginning before January 1, 1987. 
 16. “Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation” means $30,000 or, if greater,
one-fourth (1/4) of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation in effect on the last day of the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-5

 
Limitation Year. If a Limitation Year is less than 12 months, the Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation for that year shall be multiplied by one-twelfth
( 1/12) of the number of months in such year. Effective for Limitation Years beginning after
December 31, 1994, Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation means $30,000 as adjusted by Section 415(d) of the Code. 
 17.
“Defined Contribution Plan Fraction” means a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the Annual Additions to a Participant’s Accounts under all defined contribution plans maintained by the Employer or its Controlled
Group, whether or not terminated, including Employee After-Tax Contributions to any defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer and Annual Additions attributed to all welfare plans, simplified employee pension plans, and individual medical
accounts maintained by the Employer as of the end of the Limitation Year, and the denominator of which is the sum of the lesser of the following amounts determined for such Limitation Year and for all prior Limitation Years with the Employer:

 (a) 1.25 multiplied by the Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation in effect for such Limitation Year, but without regard to
Section 415(c)(6) of the Code; or 
 (b) 1.4 multiplied by 25% of the Participant’s Section 415 Compensation for such
Limitation Year determined under Section 415(c)(1)(B) or Section 415(c)(7) of the Code, if applicable. 
 Notwithstanding the
above, if an Employee was a Participant as of the first day of the first Limitation Year beginning after December 31, 1986, in one (1) or more defined contribution plans maintained by the Employer which were in existence on May 6,
1986, the numerator of the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction will be adjusted if the sum of this fraction and the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction would otherwise exceed 1.0 under the terms of this Plan. Under the adjustment, an amount equal to the
product of (i) the excess of the sum of the fractions over 1.0, times (ii) the denominator of the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction, will be permanently subtracted from the numerator of this fraction. The adjustment is calculated using
fractions as they would be computed as of the end of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987, disregarding any changes in the terms and conditions of the Plan made after May 5, 1986, but using the Section 415
limitation applicable to the first Limitation Year beginning on or after January 1, 1987. 
 18. “DEFRA” means the
Deficit Reduction Act of 1984, as amended from time to time. 
 19. “Designated Beneficiary” or
“Beneficiary” means the person(s) or entity(ies) designated by the Participant or, in the absence thereof, the person(s) or entity(ies) entitled under the provisions of this Plan to receive benefits as a result of the death of the
Participant. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-6

 20. “Direct Rollover” means a payment by the Plan to an Eligible Retirement Plan
specified by a Distributee. 
 21. “Distributee” means an Employee, former Employee, an Employee’s or former
Employee’s Surviving Spouse or an Employee’s or former Employee’s Spouse or former Spouse who is an Alternate Payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. 
 22. “Earned Income” means the net earnings of a Self-Employed Individual from self-employment (as defined in Section 1402(a) of the
Code), determined after taking into account (i) deductible contributions to the Plan and any other qualified plans maintained by the Employer; and (ii) all other adjustments required by Section 401(c)(2) of the Code; but
(iii) only if the services of the Self-Employed Individual to the Employer’s business are a material income-producing factor as determined in accordance with Section 1.401-10(c) of the Treasury Regulations. For taxable years beginning
after 1989, net earnings shall be further reduced by the deductions allowed to the taxpayer by Section 164(f) of the Code. 
 23.
“Elective Contributions” means in any Plan Year the amount of a Participant’s Compensation elected by him or her to be reduced and deferred pursuant to Article I. Any amount that the Employee could not have elected to receive
in cash or any amount that has become currently available to a Participant or that is designated or treated at the time of the deferral or contribution as an Employee After-Tax Contribution shall not be treated as an Elective Contribution. For Plan
Years beginning after August 8, 1988, Matching Contributions made on behalf of a partner or Self-Employed Individual under a partnership or Individual plan shall be treated as Elective Contributions. For Plan Years beginning after
December 31, 1997, Matching Contributions made on behalf of a partner or Self-Employed Individual shall not be treated as Elective Contributions. 
 24. “Elective Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record the Participant’s Elective Contributions and any other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan.

 25. “Elective Deferrals” means the sum of an individual’s election to defer income for a taxable year pursuant to
the following: 
 (a) Elective Contributions under any qualified cash or deferred arrangements as defined in Section 401(k) of the Code
which are not includable in the individual’s gross income for the taxable year on account of Section 402(e)(3) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-7

 (b) Any Employer contribution to a simplified employee pension plan as defined in Section 408(k) of
the Code and which is not includable in the individual’s income for the taxable year on account of Section 402(h)(1)(B) of the Code. 
 (c) Any Employer contribution to an annuity contract under Section 403(b) of the Code under a salary reduction agreement within the meaning of Section 312(a)(5)(D) of the Code which is not includable in the individual’s gross
income for the taxable year on account of Section 403(b) of the Code. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a contribution to a Section 403(b) annuity made pursuant to a one-time irrevocable election to contribute at time of eligibility
to participate shall not be included. 
 (d) Any Employee contribution designated as deductible in a trust described in
Section 501(c)(18) of the Code which is deducted from such individual’s income for the taxable year on account of Section 501(c)(18) of the Code. 
 (e) Any elective Employer contribution made under Section 408(p)(2)(A)(i) of the Code. 
 26.
“Eligibility Computation Period” means the initial 12 consecutive month period commencing on an Employee’s Employment Commencement Date and the Subsequent Eligibility Computation Period as elected in Article I. 
 27. “Eligible Participant” means any Employee who is directly or indirectly eligible to make an election to reduce and defer his or her
Compensation under the Plan during all or a portion of a Plan Year, including (i) any Employee who would be a Participant but for the failure to make any Elective Contributions or other required contributions; (ii) any Employee whose
eligibility to make Elective Contributions has been suspended due to a hardship distribution, other distribution, a loan, or an election not to participate, other than a one-time election not to be eligible to make a cash or deferred election or to
have contributions equal to a specified amount or percentage of Compensation (including no amount of Compensation) made by the Employer to this Plan and any other plan maintained by the Employer (including plans not yet established) for the duration
of the Employee’s employment; (iii) any Employee who is unable to receive an additional Annual Addition on account of Sections 415(c)(1) and 415(e) of the Code; and (iv) any Employee who is unable to make an Elective Contribution
because his or her Compensation is less than a stated dollar amount, shall be considered as an Employee for purposes of computing the Actual Deferral Percentage. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-8

 For purposes of computing the Average Contribution Percentage, Eligible Participant means any Employee
who is directly or indirectly eligible to make an Employee After-Tax Contribution or to receive an allocation of Matching Contributions, including Matching Contributions derived from forfeitures under the Plan during all or a portion of a Plan Year
including any Employee who is unable to make an Employee After-Tax Contribution or receive an allocation of Matching Contributions merely because his Compensation is less than a stated amount; any Employee who would be eligible to make Employee
After-Tax Contributions or receive Matching Contributions except for a suspension due to a hardship distribution or other distribution, loan or election not to participate in the Plan, other than a one-time election not to be eligible to make a cash
or deferred election or to have contributions equal to a specified amount or percentage of Compensation (including no amount of Compensation) made by the Employer to this Plan and any other plan maintained by the Employer (including plans not yet
established) for the duration of the Employee’s employment; and any Employee who is unable to receive additional Annual Additions because of Sections 415(c)(1) and 415(e) of the Code shall be considered as an Employee for purposes of computing
the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 28. “Eligible Retirement Plan” means an individual retirement account described
in Section 408(a) of the Code, an individual retirement annuity described in Section 408(b) of the Code, an annuity plan described in Section 403(a) of the Code, or a qualified trust described in Section 401(a) of the Code, that
accepts the Distributee’s Eligible Rollover Distribution. However, in case of an Eligible Rollover Distribution to a Surviving Spouse, an Eligible Retirement Plan is an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. 

29. “Eligible Rollover Distribution” means any distribution of $200 or more of the Distributee’s vested Accrued Benefit except
that an Eligible Rollover Distribution does not include (i) any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (made not less frequently than annually) for the life (or life expectancy) of the Distributee or the
joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the Distributee and the Distributee’s Designated Beneficiary, or for a specified period of 10 years or more; (ii) any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under
Section 401(a)(9) of the Code; (iii) the portion of any distribution that is not includable in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities); and
(iv) hardship distributions of salary deferrals within the meaning of Section 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(IV) of the Code made after December 31, 1998 or such later date as administered by the Committee but no later than December 31, 1999.

 If a Participant would have been entitled to receive his or her Elective
Contributions regardless of hardship (i.e., age 59 1/2), then such deferral shall qualify as an Eligible Rollover
Distribution. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-9

 If a portion of a distribution that includes a hardship distribution is not includible in gross income,
the portion of the distribution that is not includible in gross income is first allocated to the hardship distribution and then any remaining portion not includible in gross income is allocated to the portion of the distribution that is not a
hardship distribution. 
 30. “Employee” means every person employed by the Employer whose income is subject to withholding
of income tax or for whom Social Security contributions are made by the Employer. Unless the Plan is amended to provide otherwise, the transitional rule of Section 410(b)(6)(C) of the Code shall apply. If the Employer is an Unincorporated
Entity, Employee also means a Self-Employed Individual. 
 Employee shall include Leased Employees; provided, however, that a Leased
Employee shall not be considered an Employee if: 
 (a) The Leased Employee is covered by a money purchase pension plan providing (i) a
nonintegrated employer contribution rate of at least 10% of compensation, as defined in Section 415(c)(3) of the Code, but including amounts contributed by the employer pursuant to a salary reduction agreement which are excludable from the
Leased Employee’s gross income under Section 125, 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 403(b), 408(p)(2)(A)(i) or 457 of the Code; (ii) immediate participation; and (iii) full and immediate vesting; and 
 (b) Leased Employees do not constitute more than 20% of the Employer’s non-highly compensated workforce. 
 Employees who are Leased Employees may become Eligible Employees unless excluded in Article I. 
 31. “Employee After-Tax Contribution” means any contributions made to a plan that are designated or treated at the time of deferral or
contributions as employee after-tax contributions and are allocated to a separate account to which the attributed earnings and losses are allocated. Such term includes (i) Employee contributions to a defined contribution plan described in
Section 414(k) of the Code; (ii) Employee contributions made to a defined benefit plan which provides for a cost of living arrangement as described in Section 415(k)(2)(B) of the Code; (iii) Employee contributions applied to the
purchase of whole life insurance protection, or survivor benefits protection under a defined contribution plan; (iv) amounts attributed to Excess Contributions within the meaning of Section 401(k)(8)(B) of the Code which are
recharacterized as Employee contributions; and (v) and Employee contributions to a contract described in Section 403(b) of the Code. Employee After-Tax Contributions do not include repayment of loans, buy-backs of benefits previously
forfeited, or Employee After-Tax Contributions which were transferred to this Plan and are held pursuant to Article XVI. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-10

 32. “Employee After-Tax Contribution Account” means the Account maintained to record a
Participant’s allocation of Employee Contributions and other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 33.
“Employer” means the entity or entities adopting the Plan, and any other members of the Controlled Group which have adopted the Plan in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph D of Article XIV, and any successor thereto.
Employer also means any other entities that have adopted this Plan that are not members of a Controlled Group, and any successor thereto. The “Sponsoring Employer” shall be the Employer who is responsible for the administration of
the Plan. Each other entity which adopts this Plan as provided herein shall be a “Participating Employer”; provided, however, that only members of a Controlled Group may be Participating Employers unless the preamble of Article I
designates a non-Controlled Group as a Participating Employer. 
 34. “Employment Commencement Date” means the date upon
which an Employee first completes one (1) Hour of Service. 
 35. “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security
Act of 1974, as amended from time to time. 
 36. “Excess Aggregate Contributions” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the
excess of the aggregate amount of Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Employees for such Plan Year over the maximum amount of such contributions permitted under the Contribution Percentage
limitation. 
 37. “Excess Contributions” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of the aggregate amount of
Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year over the maximum amount of such contributions permitted under the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. 
 38. “Excess Deferrals” means those Elective Deferrals made by an individual during his or her taxable year which exceed $7,000 ($6,000
if a Simple 401(k) Plan) or such other amount that is adjusted under Section 415(d) of the Code. The special adjustments for Section 403(b) Annuity Contracts and other rules concerning Section 402(g) of the Code are incorporated
herein by reference. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-11

 39. “Family Member” means an Employee or former Employee’s Spouse and lineal
ascendants or descendants and the spouses of such lineal ascendants or descendants. 
 40. “5%-Owner” means any person who
owns directly or indirectly as defined in Section 416(i)(1)(B) of the Code (i) more than five percent (5%) of the outstanding stock of the Employer; or (ii) stock possessing more than five percent (5%) of the total combined
voting power of all stock of the Employer. If the Employer is not a corporation, 5%-Owner means any person who owns more than five percent (5%) of the capital or profits interests in the Employer. 
 For purposes of Section 401(a)(9) of the Code, a Participant shall be considered a 5%-Owner
if such Participant is a 5%-Owner at any time during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year in which such 5%-Owner attains age 70 1/2. 
 41. “Highly Compensated Employee” or “Highly Compensated
Participant” means: 
 (a) For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1997: 
 (i) Any Employee who performs services during the Plan Year; and 
 Was a 5%-Owner during the Plan Year or Look-Back Year; or 
 Received Section 415 Compensation from the
Employer in excess of $75,000 (as adjusted pursuant to Section 415(d) of the Code in effect as of the first day of any relevant Plan Year) during the Look-Back Year; or 
 Received Section 415 Compensation from the Employer in excess of $50,000 (as adjusted pursuant to Section 415(d) of the Code in effect as of
the first day of any relevant Plan Year) during the Look-back Year and was in the top 20% of Employees ranked on the basis of Section 415 Compensation during the Look-Back Year. Employees described in Section 414(q)(8) of the Code and
Q&A 9(b) of Section 1.414(q)-1T of the Regulations are excluded to the extent provided in Article I; or 
 Was an officer of the
Employer, as defined in Section 416(i) of the Code and received Section 415 Compensation during the Look-Back Year that is greater than 50% of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation for the calendar year in which the Look-Back Year began.
If no officer has received 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-12

 
Section 415 Compensation in excess of 50% of the Defined Benefit Dollar Limitation during the Plan Year or the Look-Back Year, the highest paid officer
for such year shall be treated as a Highly Compensated Employee. The number of officers is limited to 50 or if less, the greater of three (3) Employees or 10% of all Employees. Employees described in Section 414(q)(8) of the Code and
Q&A 9(b) of Section 1.414(q)-1T of the Regulations are excluded to the extent provided in Article I; or 
 Any Employee who is both
(i) described in (B) or (D) above, when such paragraphs are modified to substitute the Plan Year for the Look-Back Year; and (ii) one (1) of the 100 Employees who received the greatest Section 415 Compensation from the
Employer during the Plan Year. 
 (ii) Any former Employee who separated from service prior to the Plan Year, who performs no services for
the Employer during the Plan Year and was a Highly Compensated Employee who performed services for the Employer during either the year the Employee separated from service or any Plan Year on or after the Employee’s 55th birthday. 
 For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1997, if an Employee is, during a Plan Year or Look-Back Year, a Family Member of either a 5%-Owner who
is an Employee or former Employee or a Highly Compensated Employee who is one (1) of the 10 most Highly Compensated Employees ranked on the basis of Section 415 Compensation paid by the Employer during such year, then the Family Member and
the 5%-Owner or the top 10 Highly Compensated Employee shall be treated as a single Employee receiving Compensation and plan contributions or benefits equal to the sum of such Compensation and contributions or benefits of the Family Member and
5%-Owner or top 10 Highly Compensated Employee. For purposes of Section 401(l) of the Code, the required aggregation of Family Members shall not apply in determining the amount of Compensation of a Participant which is below the Plan’s
integration level but will apply for purposes of the Compensation Limitation. The apportionment of Compensation earned by Family Members who are required to be aggregated, and the resulting benefits and/or contributions, shall be determined by
Article I. 
 For purposes of identifying a Highly Compensated Employee, Section 415 Compensation shall also include elective or salary
reduction contributions to a cafeteria plan, cash or deferred arrangement or tax sheltered annuity. 
 For purposes of identifying a Highly
Compensated Employee, the determinations of (i) the number and identity of Employees in the top 20% or highest paid group; (ii) the top 100 Employees; (iii) the number of Employees treated as officers; and (iv) the Compensation
that is to be considered, will be made according to Section 414(q) of the Code and the regulations thereunder. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-13

 (b) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996: 
 (i) Any Employee who performs services during the Plan Year; and 
 Was a 5%-Owner during the Plan Year or Look-Back Year; or 
 Received Section 415 Compensation from the
Employer in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted pursuant to Section 415(d) of the Code, except that the base period shall be the calendar quarter ending September 30, 1996, in effect on the first day of any relevant Plan Year) during the
Look-Back Year or if elected in Article I, the calendar year beginning with or within the Look-Back Year and, if elected in Article I, was also in the Top Paid Group. 
 (ii) Any former Employee who separated from service prior to the Plan Year, who performs no services for the Employer during the Plan Year and was a Highly Compensated Employee who performed services for the Employer
during either the year the Employee separated from service or any Plan Year on or after the Employee’s 55th birthday. 
 For purposes
of determining if an Employee is a Highly Compensated Employee in 1997, subparagraphs (b)(i) and (b)(ii) of this Paragraph A.41 shall be treated as having been in effect in 1996. 
 For purposes of identifying a Highly Compensated Employee, Section 415 Compensation shall also include elective or salary reduction contributions
to a cafeteria plan, cash or deferred arrangement or tax sheltered annuity. 
 For purposes of this Paragraph A.41, all entities which are
members of a Controlled Group with the Employer shall be treated as a single Employer. 
 42. “Hour of Service” means:

 (a) Each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment. These hours shall be credited to the Employee
for the computation period(s) in which the services are performed and not when paid, if different; and 
 (b) Each hour for which an
Employee is directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment, by the Employer for a period of time during which no services are performed (without regard to whether the employment relationship between the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-14

 
Employee and the Employer has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity, disability, layoff, jury duty, military duty, or Leave of Absence
with pay. The hours shall be credited to the Employee in the computation period to which non-performance of duties relates and not in which paid, if different; and 
 (c) Each hour for which an Employee has been awarded or for which the Employer has agreed to pay, directly or indirectly, back pay (without regard to damages). These hours shall be credited to the Employee in the
computation period to which the award or agreement pertains, not the period in which paid, if different. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing,
(i) no more than 501 Hours of Service shall be credited to an Employee under subparagraph (b) or (c) of this Paragraph A.42 for any single continuous period of time during which no services are performed; (ii) an hour for which
an Employee is directly or indirectly paid for a period during which no services are performed shall not constitute an Hour of Service, if such payment is paid or due under a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable
worker’s compensation, unemployment compensation, or disability insurance laws; (iii) Hours of Service shall not be credited for payments which solely reimburse an Employee for medical or medically related expenses; (iv) the same
Hours of Service shall not be credited to an Employee both under subparagraph (a) or (b) and subparagraph (c); and (v) Hours of Service to be credited under subparagraph (b) above shall be determined based upon the number of
regularly scheduled working hours included in the units of time on the basis of which payment is calculated. 
 The Committee may determine
Hours of Service based upon days of employment in a computation period by crediting an Employee with 10 Hours of Service for each day for which the Employee would be required to be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service under
subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c) of this Paragraph A.42. Alternatively, the Committee may adopt such other equivalency rule as permitted under Section 2530.200b-3 of the Department of Labor Regulations (as amended from time to time),
which are incorporated herein by this reference. 
 The Committee shall determine Hours of Service to be credited to an Employee under the
foregoing rules in a uniform and non-discriminatory manner and in accordance with Section 2530.200b-2 of the Department of Labor Regulations (as amended from time to time), which are incorporated herein by this reference. 
 43. “Inactive Participant” means a Participant whose participation in the Plan is suspended because of a change of employment status,
including (i) terminating employment; (ii) incurring a Break-in-Service; or (iii) becoming a member of a class of Employees which has been excluded from participation, but whose total benefits have not been distributed. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-15

 44. “Investment Manager” means a fiduciary designated by the Employer or the Committee,
to whom has been delegated the responsibility and authority to manage, acquire or dispose of the Trust assets, and (i) who is (A) registered as an investment advisor under the Investment Advisors Act of 1940; (B) a bank, as defined in
that Act; or (C) an insurance company qualified to perform investment advisory services under the laws of more than one (1) state; and (ii) who has acknowledged in writing that he or she is a fiduciary with respect to the management,
acquisition and control of the Trust assets. 
 45. “Leased Employee” means any person (other than an Employee of the
Employer) who, pursuant to an agreement between the Employer and any other person (“leasing organization”), has performed services for the Employer (or for related persons determined in accordance with Section 414(n)(6) of the Code)
on a substantially full-time basis for a period of at least one (1) year, and such services are of a type historically performed by employees in the business field of the Employer. For Plan Years beginning on and after January 1, 1997, a
person will be a Leased Employee only if the services he or she performs are under the primary direction or control of the Employer. Contributions or benefits provided to a Leased Employee by the leasing organization which are attributable to
services performed for the Employer shall be treated as provided by the Employer. 
 46. “Leave of Absence” means a leave
granted by the Employer, in its sole discretion, in accordance with rules uniformly applied to all Employees, for reasons of health or public service or for reasons determined by the Employer to be in its best interests. 
 Effective December 12, 1994, contribution, benefit and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance
with Section 414(u) of the Code. If elected in Article I, the Committee shall suspend loan repayments during any Participant’s periods of qualified military service. 
 47. “Look-Back Year” means the 12-month period immediately preceding any relevant Plan Year or the calendar year ending with or within
the Plan Year, as elected in Article I. 
 For Plan Years beginning on and after January 1, 1997, Look-Back Year means the 12-month
period immediately preceding any relevant Plan Year. However, if elected in Article I, for the Plan Year beginning in 1997, the Look-Back Year may be the calendar year ending with or within the Plan Year. 
 48. “Matching Contribution” means an Employer contribution made to the Plan or a defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer on
account of an Employee After-Tax Contribution or an Elective Contribution, and any reallocated 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-16

 
forfeiture allocated on the basis of an Employee After-Tax Contribution, Matching Contribution or Elective Contribution. For Plan Years beginning after
December 31, 1988, any contributions used to satisfy Top-Heavy minimum benefits shall not be treated as Matching Contributions. 
 49.
“Matching Contribution Account” means the account maintained separately to record each Participant’s Matching Contributions and other adjustments as required under Article V or X of the Plan. 
 50. “Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence” means an absence (i) because of the Employee’s pregnancy; (ii) because of
the birth of a child of the Employee; (iii) because of the adoption of a child by, and placement of the child with, the Employee; or (iv) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or
placement. The Hours of Service credited under this Paragraph A.50 shall be credited (i) in the Eligibility Computation Period and/or Vesting Computation Period in which the absence begins if the crediting is necessary to prevent a
Break-in-Service in that computation period; or (ii) in all other cases, in the following Eligibility Computation Period and/or Vesting Computation Period. No Hours of Service for Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence shall be credited to a
Participant unless he or she timely furnishes to the Committee such information as the Committee may request to establish that the absence is for a Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence and the number of days of such absence. The total Hours of
Service to be credited for Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence shall not exceed 501 in any computation period. 
 51. “Net
Profits” means the net income of the Employer as determined for federal income tax purposes without any deduction for taxes based upon income or for contributions made by the Employer under this Plan or any other qualified plan maintained
by the Employer. For a Self-Employed Individual, Net Profits mean Earned Income, as determined under Section 404(a)(8) of the Code. 
 52. “Nonelective Employer Contributions” means Employer contributions other than Matching Contributions with respect to which the Employee may not elect to have the contributions paid to the Employee in cash or other
benefits. 
 53. “Nonelective Employer Contribution Account” means the Account maintained to record a Participant’s
allocations of Nonelective Employer Contributions, forfeitures, if any, and other adjustments as required under Article V of the Plan. 
 54.
“Non-Highly Compensated Employee” or “Non-Highly Compensated Participant” means an Employee of the Employer who is neither a Highly Compensated Employee nor a Family Member of a Highly Compensated Employee. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-17

 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, Non-Highly Compensated Employee means an Employee
who is not a Highly Compensated Employee. 
 55. “One-Year Period of Service” means each 12 month Period of Service
beginning on the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date. 
 56. “One-Year Period of Severance” means each 12
consecutive month Period of Severance, beginning on the Severance from Service Date. 
 57. “Owner-Employee” means a
Self-Employed Individual who owns the entire interest of an Unincorporated Entity, or a partner who owns more than a 10% capital or profits interest in a partnership. 
 If this Plan provides contributions or benefits for one (1) or more Owner-Employees who control both the business for which this Plan is established and one (1) or more other trades or businesses, this Plan
and any plans established for such other trades or businesses must, when looked at as a single plan, satisfy Sections 401(a) and 401(d) of the Code for the employees of this and all other such trades or businesses. 
 If the Plan provides contributions or benefits for one (1) or more Owner-Employees who control one (1) or more other trades or businesses, the
employees of the other trades or businesses must be included in a plan which satisfies Sections 401(a) and 401(d) of the Code and which provides contributions and benefits not less favorable than provided for Owner-Employees under this Plan.

 If an individual is covered as an Owner-Employee under the plans of two (2) or more trades or businesses which are not controlled
and the individual controls a trade or business, then the contributions or benefits of the employees under the plan of the trade or business which are controlled must be as favorable as those provided for him or her under the most favorable plan of
the trade or business which is not controlled. 
 For purposes of the preceding paragraphs, an Owner-Employee, or two (2) or more
Owner-Employees, will be considered to control a trade or business if the Owner-Employee, or two (2) or more Owner-Employees together: 
 (a) Own the entire interest in an unincorporated trade or business; or 
 (b) In the case of a partnership, own more than 50% of
either the capital interest or the profits interest in the partnership. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-18

 For purposes subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph A.57, an Owner-Employee or two (2) or more
Owner-Employees shall be treated as owning any interest in a partnership which is owned, directly or indirectly, by a partnership which such Owner-Employee, or such two (2) or more Owner-Employees, are considered to control within the meaning
of such subparagraph (b). 
 For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1997, the preceding controlled group provisions relating
to Section 401(d) of the Code shall no longer apply. 
 58. “Participant” means any Eligible Employee who enters the
Plan and who has not received payment of his or her total vested Accrued Benefit. 
 59. “Period of Service” means a period
beginning on the Employment Commencement Date or, for a former Employee, the date on which he or she first performs an Hour of Service after re-hire and ending with the Severance from Service Date. 
 60. “Period of Severance” means a period during which an Employee does not perform an Hour of Service, beginning on the Severance from
Service Date and ending when an Employee again performs an Hour of Service. 
 61. “Plan” means this 401(k) Plan as
identified in Article I. 
 62. “Qualified Domestic Relations Order” means a judgment, decree or order (including approval
of a property settlement agreement) that (i) relates to the provision of child support, alimony payments or marital property rights to an alternate payee; (ii) is made pursuant to a state domestic relations law (including community
property law); (iii) creates or recognizes the existence of an alternate payee’s right, or assigns to an alternate payee the right, to receive all or a portion of the benefits payable to the Participant under the Plan; (iv) specifies
the information required by Section 414(p) of the Code; (v) does not alter the amount or form of Plan benefits; and (vi) complies with all other relevant provisions of Section 414(p) of the Code. For such purposes, an
“Alternate Payee” is a Spouse, former Spouse, child or other dependent of a Participant who is recognized by a domestic relations order as having a right to receive all or a portion of the benefits payable with respect to a
Participant under the Plan. 
 63. “Qualified Matching Contributions” means Matching Contributions, other than Safe Harbor
Matching Contributions or Simple 401(k) Contributions, that satisfy the vesting and distribution requirements of Elective Contributions. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-19

 64. “Qualified Matching Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record
separately a Participant’s allocation of a Qualified Matching Contribution, and other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 65. “Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions” means Employer contributions, other than Elective Contributions, Matching Contributions, Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions, Safe Harbor
Matching Contributions or Simple 401(k) Contributions, that satisfy the vesting and distribution requirements of Elective Contributions. 
 66. “Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record a Participant’s allocation of Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions, and other adjustments as required under
Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 67. “Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions” means Elective Contributions in
combination with Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions that are treated as Elective Contributions to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. 
 68. “Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions” means Employee After-Tax Contributions and Employer Matching Contributions in
combination with Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions that are treated as Employee After-Tax Contributions to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 69. “REACT” means the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, as amended from time to time. 
 70. “Rollover Contributions” means contributions within the meaning of Section 402(c), 403(a)(4) or 408(d)(3) of the Code.

 71. “Rollover Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record a Participant’s Rollover Contribution and
other adjustments as required in Article X of the Plan. 
 72. “Safe Harbor Matching Contributions” means Matching
Contributions made to this Plan, or to another defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer, to satisfy the Average Deferred Percentage limitation or Average Contribution limitation that are (i) fully vested; (ii) subject to the
withdrawal restrictions of Elective Contributions but not available to hardship withdrawals; and (iii) used to satisfy the allocation requirements of Section 401(k)(12)(B) of the Code and the notice requirements of
Section 401(k)(12)(D) of the Code without regard to Section 401(l) of the Code. For 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-20

 
Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1999, if Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are made to another defined contribution plan maintained by the
Employer, such plan must have the same Plan Year as this Plan. 
 The rate of Safe Harbor Matching Contributions allocated to Participants
can not increase as a Participant’s rate of Elective Contributions increase. The rate of Safe Harbor Matching Contributions allocation to Non-Highly Compensated Participants must at all times be equal to the rate of Matching Contributions,
including Safe Harbor Matching Contributions, allocated to Highly Compensated Participants. 
 73. “Safe Harbor Matching Contribution
Account” means the account maintained to record the Participant’s Safe Harbor Matching Contributions and any other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 74. “Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions” means Nonelective Employer Contributions made to this Plan, or to another defined
contribution plan maintained by the Employer, to satisfy the Actual Deferred Percentage limitation, that are (i) fully vested; (ii) subject to the withdrawal restrictions of Elective Contributions but not available for hardship
withdrawals; and (iii) used to satisfy the allocation requirements of Section 401(k)(12)(C) of the Code and the notice requirements of Section 401(k)(12)(D) of the Code without regard to Section 401(l) of the Code. For Plan Years
beginning after December 31, 1999, if Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions are made to another defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer, such plan must have the same Plan Year as this Plan. 
 75. “Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record the Participant’s Safe Harbor
Nonelective Employer Contributions and any other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 76. “Section 415
Compensation” means, with respect to any Participant, the greatest of (a), (b) or (c) below: 
 (a) Information required
to be reported under Sections 6041, 6051, and 6052 of the Code (wages, tips and other compensation as reported on form W-2). Compensation is defined as wages within the meaning of Section 3401(a) of the Code and all other payments of
compensation to an Employee by the Employer (in the course of the Employer’s trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under Sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3), and 6052 of the Code.
Compensation must be determined without regard to any rules under Section 3401(a) of the Code that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for
agricultural labor in Section 3401(a)(2) of the Code). 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-21

 (b) Wages as defined in Section 3401(a) of the Code for the purpose of income tax withholding but
determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Section 3401(a)(2) of the Code).

 (c) A Participant’s wages, salaries, and fees for professional services, and other amounts received for personal services actually
rendered in the course of employment with the Employer maintaining the Plan (including, but not limited to, commissions paid salesmen, compensation for services on the basis of a percentage of profits, commissions on insurance premiums, tips,
bonuses, fringe benefits, and reimbursement or other expense allowances under a nonaccountable plan. The following items are excluded from Section 415 Compensation under this subparagraph (c): 
 (i) Employer contributions to a plan of deferred compensation which are not included in the Employee’s gross income for the taxable year in which
contributed or Employer contributions under a simplified employee pension plan to the extent such contributions are deductible by the Employee, or any distributions from a plan of deferred compensation; 
 (ii) Amounts realized from the exercise of a nonqualified stock option, or when restricted stock (or property) held by the Employee either becomes
freely transferable or is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; 
 (iii) Amounts realized from the sale, exchange or other
disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock option; and 
 (iv) Other amounts which received special tax benefits, or
contributions made by the Employer (whether or not under a salary reduction agreement) towards the purchase of an annuity described in Section 403(b) of the Code (whether or not the amounts are actually excludable from the gross income of the
Employee). 
 If the Employee is a Self-Employed Individual, his or her Section 415 Compensation includes his or her Earned Income
derived from the trade or business for which the Plan is established. 
 Effective for years beginning after December 31, 1997,
Section 415 Compensation shall include any Elective Deferrals and any amount deferred by an Employee which is not includable in gross income by reasons of Section 125 or 457 of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-22

 77. “Self-Employed Individual” means a person who has Earned Income for the taxable year
from the trade or business for which the Plan is established and includes an individual who would have had Earned Income but for the fact that the trade or business had no Net Profits for the taxable year. 
 78. “Severance from Service Date” means the date which is the earlier of the date on which an Employee voluntarily leaves (quits)
employment, retires, is discharged or dies, or the first anniversary of the first date the Employee is absent for any other reason. However, for purposes of Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence, Severance from Service Date of an Employee who is
absent beyond the first anniversary of such absence means the second anniversary of the first date of such absence. The period between the first and second anniversary of a Maternity or Paternity Leave of Absence is neither a Period of Service nor a
Period of Severance. 
 79. “Shareholder-Employee” means an employee of a subchapter S corporation (Section 1361, et
seq., of the Code) who owns more than five percent (5%) of the outstanding stock of such corporation. 
 80. “Simple
401(k) Contributions” means Matching Contributions that satisfy the allocation requirements of Section 401(k)(11)(B)(i)(II) of the Code or Nonelective Employer Contributions that satisfy the allocation requirements of
Section 401(k)(11)(B)(ii) of the Code. Simple 401(k) Contributions must satisfy the administrative and notice requirements of Section 401(k)(11)(B)(iii) of the Code and the fully vested requirements of Section 408(p)(3) of the Code.

 81. “Simple 401(k) Contribution Account” means the account maintained to record the Participant’s Simple 401(k)
Contributions and any other adjustments as required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 82. “Simple 401(k) Plan” means
a plan intended to satisfy the requirements of Section 401(k)(11) of the Code. If the Employer elects in Article I that this Plan is intended to satisfy the requirements of a Simple 401(k) Plan, Employees covered under this Plan shall not be
eligible to participate under any other plan maintained by the Employer. Except as stated below, if an Employer employs more than 100 Employees who earn at least $5,000 of Section 415 Compensation during the prior year, such Employer shall not
be eligible to maintain a Simple 401(k) Plan. A Simple 401(k) Plan must have a calendar year as its Plan Year. 
 An eligible Employer that
maintains a Simple 401(k) Plan and later fails to be an eligible Employer for any subsequent year, shall be treated as an eligible Employer for the two (2) years following the last year the Employer was an eligible Employer. If the failure is
due to any acquisition, disposition, or similar transaction involving an eligible Employer, the preceding sentence applies only if the provisions of Section 410(b)(6)(C)(i) of the Code are satisfied. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-23

 If this Plan is a Simple 401(k) Plan as elected in Article I, the Employer shall be required to make
Simple 401(k) Contributions as described in Article I. No other contributions may be made to the Plan other than Elective Contributions and Simple 401(k) Contributions and to the extent that any other provision of the Plan is inconsistent with the
provision of a Simple 401(k) Plan, the provisions of the Simple 401(k) Plan shall apply. 
 83. “Single Employer Plan” means
a plan maintained by one (1) Employer, or a plan maintained by more than one (1) Employer, all of which are members of a Controlled Group, and which is designed to comply with the provisions of Sections 413(c), 414(b), 414(c) and 414(m) of
the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder. 
 84. “Social Security Retirement Age” means age 65 for a
Participant born before January 1, 1938; age 66 for a Participant born after December 31, 1937 and before January 1, 1955; and age 67 for a Participant born after December 31, 1954. 
 85. “Social Security Wage Base” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the maximum amount of earnings which may be considered wages under
Section 3121(a) of the Code for the calendar year in which falls the beginning of such Plan Year as in effect on the first day of such Plan Year. 
 86. “TEFRA” means the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act of 1982, as amended from time to time. 
 87. “Top Paid Group” means the group consisting of the top 20% of the Employees when ranked on the basis of Section 415 Compensation during either the Look-Back Year or the calendar year
beginning with or within the Look-Back Year as selected in Article I. 
 Employees described in Section 414(q)(5) of the Code and
Q&A 9(b) of Section 1.414(q)-1T of the Regulations are included or excluded to the extent provided in Article I. 
 88. “TRA
‘86” means the Tax Reform Act of 1986, as amended from time to time. 
 89. “Total Disability” means the
inability to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or which has lasted or can be expected to last 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-24

 
for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, as determined by a licensed physician selected or approved by the Committee, or such other definition as
elected in Article I. 
 90. “Transferred Benefits Account” means the Account maintained to record a Participant’s
Transferred Benefit, forfeitures, if any, and other adjustments required under Article IV, V or X of the Plan. 
 91.
“Trust” means the Trust Agreement entered into between the Employer and the Trustee. A Trust may include a custodial agreement or insurance contract, if applicable. 
 92. “Trustee” means the trustee(s) named under the Trust or any successor Trustee named in a written instrument of the Board.

 93. “Unincorporated Entity” means a sole proprietorship or a partnership. 
 94. “Vesting Computation Period” means the 12 consecutive month period ending on the last day of the Plan Year that includes an
Employee’s Employment Commencement Date and the last day of each subsequent Plan Year. 
 If elected in Article I or if the elapsed
time method is selected in Article I, Vesting Computation Period means each 12 consecutive month period beginning on the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date and any subsequent 12 consecutive month period commencing on any anniversary date
of the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date. 
 95. “Year of Service” means an Eligibility Computation Period or
Vesting Computation Period during which an Employee completes 1,000 or more Hours of Service or such lesser amount, if elected in Article I, with the Employer. With respect to any Eligibility Computation Period and any Vesting Computation Period,
Hours of Service with any member of a Controlled Group shall be credited to the relevant Computation Period. Unless elected otherwise in Article I, for purposes of eligibility and vesting, if a Plan Year is less than 12 months and an Employee has
less than 1,000 Hours of Service during such short Plan Year but has completed 1,000 Hours of Service or such lesser amount, if elected in Article I, during the 12 consecutive month period ending on the last day of such short Plan Year, the Employee
will be credited with one (1) Year of Service for the Plan Year. If such Plan Year is not an Eligibility Computation Period for an Employee, the preceding sentence shall not apply for eligibility purposes. 
 For purposes of the elapsed time method, a “Year of Service” means a One-Year Period of Service with the Employer. An Employee will receive

  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-25

 
credit for the aggregate of all time period(s) commencing with the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date or the date such Employee is credited with an
Hour of Service upon re-employment and ending on the date a One-Year Period of Severance begins. An Employee will also receive credit for any Period of Severance of less than 12 consecutive months. Fractional portions of a year will be expressed in
terms of days. 
 B. Terms Not Defined in Article I and II of this Plan. The following terms are defined in the Paragraphs and
Articles specified below. 
 1. Annuity Starting Date – See Paragraph A.1 of Article VII. 
 2. Determination Date – See Paragraph A.1 of Article VIII. 
 3. Election Period – See Paragraph A.2 of Article VII. 
 4. Key Employee – See
Paragraph A.2 of Article VIII. 
 5. Non-Key Employee – See Paragraph A.3 of Article VIII. 
 6. Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity – See Paragraph A.3 of Article VII. 
 7. Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity – See Paragraph A.4 of Article VII. 
 8. Required and Permissive Aggregation Groups – See Paragraphs A.6 and B of Article VIII. 
 9. Spouse or Surviving Spouse – See Paragraph A.5 of Article VII. 
 10. Top-heavy Group – See Paragraph A.5 of Article VIII. 
 11. Top-heavy Plan – See Paragraph A.4 of Article VIII. 
 12. Transferred Benefits –
See Paragraph A.6 of Article VII. 
 13. Waiver Election – See Paragraph A.7 of Article VII. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE II	  	 II-26

 III. PARTICIPATION AND MEMBERSHIP 
 A. Participation Date. Each Eligible Employee shall become a Participant on the Entry Date specified in Article I if he or she is employed on such
Entry Date. 
 1. Vested Participants. Any vested Participant who terminates employment and who is subsequently re-employed, shall be
readmitted as a Participant as of the first day or his or her re-employment. 
 2. Non-Vested Participants. Any non-vested Participant
who terminates employment and who is subsequently re-employed shall be considered a new Employee, and must again satisfy the requirements to become an Eligible Employee if his or her period of consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service equals or exceeds
the greater of (i) five (5); or (ii) the aggregate number of Years of Service completed before such termination of employment. If such former Participant is not considered a new Employee pursuant to this Paragraph A.2, such former
Participant shall participate in the Plan immediately upon his or her re-employment. 
 3. Employee Not a Participant. Any Employee
who terminates employment prior to his or her Entry Date, but after satisfying the eligibility requirements of Article I, and who is re-hired prior to incurring five (5) consecutive Breaks-in-Service shall become a Participant on the later of
(i) his or her date of re-employment; or (ii) the first Entry Date following the date he or she becomes an Eligible Employee. If this Plan provides for immediate full vesting of all Accounts, then an Employee who did not satisfy the
Plan’s service requirement and has incurred a one-year Break-in-Service shall have his or her prior service disregarded. Any Employee who terminates employment prior to his or her Entry Date and who is re-hired after incurring five
(5) consecutive Breaks-in-Service shall be considered a new Employee. 
 4. Change in Employment Status. Any Employee who is not
a member of an eligible class of employees and becomes a member of an eligible class will participate immediately if such Employee would have otherwise previously become a Participant. 
 If a Participant becomes an Inactive Participant and has not incurred a one-year Break-in-Service, such Employee will participate immediately upon
returning to an eligible class of employees. If such Participant incurs a one-year Break-in-Service, eligibility will be determined under the Break-in-Service rules of this Article III. 
 B. Leave of Absence. For purposes of eligibility, no Employee shall be deemed to have suffered a Break-in-Service if his or her employment is
interrupted because such Employee has been on a Leave of Absence. For purposes of eligibility, a Break-in-Service 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE III	  	 III-1

 
shall not be deemed to have occurred while an Employee is a member of the armed forces of the United States, provided that he or she returns to the service
of the Employer within 90 days (or such longer period as may be prescribed by law) from the date he or she first became entitled to his or her discharge. 
 C. Enrollment. The Employer shall, from time to time as requested by the Committee, provide a list of all of its Employees, their names and ages, the number of Hours of Service completed by each during the
current Plan Year or other applicable Computation Period, their dates of hire, and any additional information the Committee may require. The Committee shall determine from such lists which Employees are Eligible Employees and their Entry Dates for
participation under the Plan. 
 D. Omission of Eligible Employee. If, in any Plan Year, any Employee who should be included as a
Participant in the Plan is erroneously omitted or an error caused a Participant to be credited with less than his or her full allocation, the Committee shall determine the amounts (or additional amounts) which should have been credited to such
Participant’s Account. To correct any such error or omission, the correct amount may be deducted from forfeitures and/or earnings prior to allocating such amounts to other Participants in lieu of adjusting Accounts of other Participants. In
addition to (or instead of) the preceding adjustment, the Employer may make a special contribution including earnings to correct any such error or omission. 
 E. Inclusion of Ineligible Employee. If, in any Plan Year, any person who should not have been included as a Participant in the Plan is erroneously included and discovery of such incorrect inclusion is not made
until after an Employer contribution for the relevant Plan Year(s) has been made, the amount contributed, as adjusted with earnings or losses if necessary, with respect to the ineligible person shall constitute a forfeiture for the Plan Year in
which the discovery is made. Any Employee After-Tax Contributions or Elective Contributions made by an ineligible Employee adjusted with earnings or losses, if necessary, shall be returned to the Employee. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE III	  	 III-2

 IV. EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS 
 A. In General. For each Plan Year in which this Plan is in effect, the Employer shall make contributions to the Trust in one (1) or more
installments in such amounts, if any, as provided in Article I; provided that (i) the Plan Year for which each contribution is made shall be designated at the time of the contribution or upon the income tax return of the Employer for any
relevant Plan Year; (ii) no contribution to this Plan for any Plan Year shall exceed an amount which the Employer estimates will be deductible under Sections 404(a) and 404(j) of the Code; (iii) no contribution for any Plan Year shall
cause the limitations on the Annual Addition of any Participant to be exceeded for such Plan Year; and (iv) no contribution shall be made for any Participant who did not complete a Year of Service during the relevant Plan Year unless Article I
provides otherwise. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, contributions made to an Owner-Employee may be made only from
such Owner-Employee’s Earned Income derived from the trade or business for which the Plan is established. 
 B. Special Make-up
Contribution. A previously forfeited Account Balance shall be restored in accordance with Article I. 
 C. Corrective
Contributions. Subject to all applicable limitations of the Code, the Employer may make additional contributions to the Plan as needed to correct any errors in administration which may occur from time to time. Such corrective contributions shall
be limited to the extent necessary (including earnings as applicable) to place affected Participants in the position they would have been in but for such error or errors, and shall be allocated to the account or accounts from which the error was
made, subject to all rules and procedures otherwise applicable to such Accounts. 
 D. Profit Sharing and Retirement Savings
(401(k)) Contributions. The provisions of this Paragraph D shall apply to contributions made pursuant to the cash or deferred feature of the Plan. 
 1. Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions. The Employer intends that all Qualifying Employer Contributions shall satisfy all of the requirements of Section 401(k) of the Code and the Treasury
Regulations promulgated thereunder as constituting a qualified cash or deferred arrangement. Each Participant shall be fully vested in his or her Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions at all times. 
 2. Participant Elective Contributions. As permitted in Paragraph H.2 of Article I, a Participant may elect to reduce and defer the receipt of his
or her Compensation, the Employer shall reduce such Participant’s Compensation in the elected amount through payroll withholding and contribute to the Plan on behalf of each such electing Participant an amount equal to the Compensation to be
reduced and 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-1

 
deferred. A Participant’s Elective Contributions shall be credited to his or her Elective Contribution Account, and generally will be paid by the
Employer to the Plan no later than the 15th business day following the month in which the amount was withheld from the Participant’s payroll. 

 3. Changes in Elective Contributions. A Participant may suspend his or her Elective Contributions at any time. The rules and
procedures for allowing Participants to defer and reduce their Compensation under Paragraph H.2 of Article I and this Paragraph D.3 and to decrease (or increase) such reductions and deferrals shall be established by the Committee, in its sole
discretion; provided, however, that the Committee shall exercise its discretion in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner. If this Plan provides for Safe Harbor Matching Contributions, a Participant shall have a reasonable opportunity and a
reasonable period of time to increase, decrease, or resume his or her Elective Contributions. A 30 day period shall be deemed a reasonable period of time. 
 4. Simple 401(k) Plans. If this is a Simple 401(k) Plan, in addition to any other election periods, each Employee may make or modify his or her salary reduction election during the 60-day period immediately
preceding each January 1. If the Employee elects to suspend his or her Elective Contributions during the Plan Year, the Committee may require the Employee to wait until the beginning of the next Plan Year before he or she may resume his or her
Elective Contributions. The Employer shall notify each Eligible Employee of his or her election rights prior to the 60-day election period and shall indicate the type and amount of the Simple 401(k) Contribution to be made. 
 E. Actual Deferral Percentage Limitation. For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1997, the amount of Qualifying Section 401(k)
Contributions made on behalf of the group consisting of Highly Compensated Employees shall not result in an Actual Deferral Percentage that exceeds the greater of: 
 1. The Actual Deferral Percentage limitation for the group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible
Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or 
 2. The Actual Deferral Percentage for the
group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by two (2), and
provided that the Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees
by more than two (2) percentage points or such lesser amounts as prescribed to prevent the multiple use of this alternative limitation with respect to any Highly Compensated Employee. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-2

 For Plan Years, beginning after December 31, 1996, the amount of Qualifying Section 401(k)
Contributions made on behalf of the group consisting of Highly Compensated Employees shall not result in an Actual Deferral Percentage that exceeds the greater of the following: 
 (a) The Actual Deferral Percentage limitation for the group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the current Plan Year shall
not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or preceding Plan Year as elected in Article I multiplied by 1.25; or 
 (b) The Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the current Plan Year shall not
exceed the Average Deferral Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or preceding Plan Year as elected in Article I, multiplied by two (2), and provided that the Actual Deferral Percentage for the
group of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for the group of Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or preceding Plan Year, as elected in
Article I, by more than two (2) percentage points or such lesser amount as prescribed to prevent the multiple use of this alternative limitation with respect to any Highly Compensated Employee. 
 For the first Plan Year in which the Plan (other than a successor plan) provides for a cash or deferred arrangement, the Actual Deferral Percentage of
eligible Non-Highly Compensated Employees under the prior year testing method shall be the greater of three percent (3%) or the Actual Deferral Percentage of the Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the first Plan Year. 
 If the Plan provides for the prior year testing method, the Actual Deferral Percentage shall be determined without regard to changes in the group of
Non-Highly Compensated Employees who are Eligible Participants during the testing year. 
 An Elective Contribution, Safe Harbor Nonelective
Employer Contribution or Safe Harbor Matching Contribution will be taken into account under the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation for the Plan Year only if it is allocated to the Employee as of any date within the Plan Year. An Elective
Contribution, Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution and Safe Harbor Matching Contribution is considered allocated as of any date within a Plan Year if the allocation is not contingent on participation or performance of services after such date and
the Elective Contribution is actually paid to 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-3

 
the Trust no later than 12 months after the close of the Plan Year to which such contributions relate. Additionally, an Elective Contribution must relate to
Compensation that either would have been received by the Employee during the Plan Year, except for the Employee election to defer, or is attributable to the performance of services during the Plan Year that would have become payable within 2 1/2 months after the close of the Plan Year, except for the Employee election to defer. 
 F. Safe Harbor Contributions. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1998, if the Employer provides for Safe Harbor Matching
Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions during a Plan Year that satisfy the requirements of Section 401(k)(12) of the Code, the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation shall be deemed satisfied for such Plan Year provided
that: 
 1. If Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions or Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are made to the Plan to satisfy the Actual
Deferral Percentage limitation or the Average Contribution Percentage for a Plan Year, such Plan shall be required to use the current year testing method for Non-Highly Compensated Participants in any Plan Year in which Safe Harbor Nonelective
Employer Contributions or Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are made. Such contributions, like Elective Contributions and Matching Contributions, shall be subject to rules relating to changes from current year testing to prior year testing, and the
anti-abuse provisions of Section VIII of IRS Notice 98-1. 
 2. Any Compensation definition elected in Article I must state a uniform
definition of Compensation and comply with Section 414(s) of the Code and Section 1.414(s)-1 of the Treasury Regulations; provided, however, the last sentence of Section 1.414(s)-1(d)(2)(iii) of the Treasury Regulations pertaining to
compensation above a specified dollar amount shall not apply to a Non-Highly Compensated Employee. 
 3. A plan year must be a 12 consecutive
month period or if the Plan is a newly established plan (other than a successor plan within the meaning of IRS Notice 98-1), a period of at least three (3) consecutive months (or, a shorter period if the Employer is a newly established Employer
and this Plan is established as soon as administratively feasible after the establishment of the Employer). Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the case of a cash or deferred arrangement that is added to an existing profit-sharing, stock
bonus, or pre-ERISA money purchase pension plan for the first time during a plan year, the requirements of Section V of Notice 98-52 will be treated as being satisfied for the entire plan year and the cash or deferred arrangement will not be treated
as failing to satisfy the requirements of Section X of Notice 98-52, provided (i) the plan is not a successor plan (within the meaning of IRS Notice 98-1), (ii) the cash or deferred arrangement is made effective no later than three
(3) months prior to the end of the plan year, and (iii) the requirements of Safe Harbor Nonelective Contributions or Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are satisfied for the period from the effective date of the cash or deferred
arrangement to the end of the plan year. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-4

 4. To satisfy the notice requirements in regard to Safe Harbor Matching Contributions or Safe Harbor
Nonelective Employer Contributions, the notice given by the Committee to Employees must be sufficiently accurate and comprehensive to inform the Employee of his or her rights and obligations under the Plan and must be written in a manner that can be
understood by the average Employee eligible to participate in the Plan. 
 The notice must accurately describe (i) the Safe Harbor
Matching Contribution formula or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contribution formula used under the Plan (including a description of the level of Matching Contributions, if any, available under the Plan); (ii) any other contributions under
the Plan (including Nonelective Employer Contributions and discretionary Matching Contributions), the condition and allocation requirements to receive such contributions; (iii) the Plan to which safe harbor contributions will be made if other
than this Plan; (iv) the type and amount of Compensation that may be deferred under the Plan; (v) how to make a cash deferred election, including any administrative requirements that apply to Elective Contributions; (vi) the periods
available under the Plan for making cash or deferred elections; and (vii) withdrawal and vesting provisions pertaining to each contribution made under the Plan. 
 A plan will not fail to satisfy the content requirement of (ii), (iii), (iv) and (vii) of the preceding paragraph if the notice instead cross-references the relevant portions of an up-to-date summary plan
description that has been provided (or concurrently is provided) to the Employee. However, the notice must still accurately describe (i) the Safe Harbor Matching Contribution or Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution formula used under the Plan
(including a description of the levels of Matching Contributions, if any, available under the Plan) and state that these contributions (as well as Elective Contributions) are fully vested when made and (ii) how to make Elective Contributions
(including any administrative requirements that apply to such elections) and the periods available under the Plan for making such elections. In addition, the notice must also provide information that makes it easy for Eligible Employees to obtain
additional information about the Plan (including an additional copy of the summary plan description) such as telephone numbers, addresses and, if applicable, electronic addresses, of the individuals or offices from whom Employees can obtain such
plan information. 
 Such notice may be given through an electronic medium if reasonably accessible to the Employee, provided that
(i) the system under which the electronic notice is provided is reasonably designed to provide the notice in a manner no less understandable to the Employee than a written paper document, and (ii) at the 
 time the electronic notice is given, the Employee is advised that he or she may request and obtain a written paper document at no charge. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-5

 For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 2000, a Plan shall not fail the notice requirements
because all items listed above are not included, provided that such notice satisfies a good faith interpretation of the requirements of Sections 401(k)(12) and 401(m)(11) of the Code. 
 The notice requirements must be given within a reasonable time before the beginning of each Plan Year (or, if an Employee becomes eligible after the
preceding notice has been given, within a reasonable period before the Employee is eligible). If the notice is given at least 30 days and no more than 90 days before the beginning of each Plan Year, the notice requirements shall be deemed timely. If
an Employee became eligible to participate after the 90th day before the beginning of the Plan Year, notice shall be deemed timely if given to such Employee no more than 90 days before he or she becomes eligible to participate and no later than the
Employee’s Entry Date. The preceding sentence shall also apply for a new established 401(k) Plan. 
 If the Plan provides safe harbor
contributions for the first time for the Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1999 but before June 2, 2000, the notice shall be deemed timely if given by May 1, 2000. For the Plan Year beginning on or before April 1, 1999, the
notice shall be deemed timely if given on or before March 1, 1999, provided that all other safe harbor provisions are complied with for the entire Plan Year. 
 5. Any Safe Harbor Matching Contribution formula elected in Article I must, at any rate of Elective Contributions, provide an aggregate amount of Safe Harbor Matching Contributions to Non-Highly Compensated
Participants at least equal to the aggregate amount of Safe Harbor Matching Contributions that would have been provided under Section 401(k)(12)(B)(i) of the Code. 
 6. For Plan Years beginning after September 30, 2003 or such other date required by the Internal Revenue Service, safe harbor provisions under Section 401(k)(12) of the Code must be adopted prior to the
first day of the Plan Year in which such provisions became effective. 
 Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, if the Plan provides for
the current year testing method for the Actual Deferral Percentage and the Average Contribution Percentage, if applicable, the Plan may be amended to provide Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions as late as 30 days prior to the last day of
the Plan Year if Eligible Employees receive notice prior to the beginning of such Plan Year that the Employer may provide Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions of at least three percent (3%) of Compensation. If the Employer does
provide for Safe 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-6

 
Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions, the notice requirements of subparagraph F.4 above shall apply and Eligible Employees must be given a supplemental
notice at least 30 days before the end of the Plan Year that Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions of at least three percent (3%) of Compensation will be made. 
 7. Safe Harbor Matching Contributions and Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions shall not be used as Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions. 
 8. If Safe Harbor Matching Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer
Contributions are provided in another defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer, any Eligible Employee under the plan that provides for a cash or deferred arrangement must be an Eligible Employee under the plan that provides for Safe
Harbor Matching Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions. Safe Harbor Matching Contributions and Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions cannot be used to satisfy the safe harbor requirements of Notice 98-52 Section V.B
with respect to more than one plan. 
 G. Simple 401(k) Plans. If this Plan is a Simple 401(k) Plan, the Actual Deferral Percentage
limitation shall be deemed satisfied provided that the following additional notice requirements are satisfied: 
 1. Each Participant may elect, during the 60 day period immediately preceding each January 1st (and 60 days before the
first day an Employee is first eligible to participate), to increase, decrease, or resume his or her Elective Contributions. 
 2. The
Committee shall notify each Participant within a reasonable period of time prior to the 60-day election period that an Employee can modify his or her election to defer and the Employee’s rights to participate under the Plan. If an Employee
becomes eligible after the 60-day election period, the 60-day election period shall be deemed satisfied if the Employee may make or modify a salary reduction election during a 60-day period that includes either the date the Employee becomes eligible
to participate or the day before the Employee’s Entry Date. 
 3. If the Employer maintained this Plan during 1997, prior to adopting
Simple 401(k) Plan provisions, then contributions made prior to the adoption of Simple 401(k) Plan provisions shall be treated as Simple 401(k) Contributions only if (i) the Employer adopts the Simple 401(k) Plan provisions by July 1,
1997, effective as of January 1, 1997; (ii) the salary reduction contributions for the year made prior to adoption of the amendment do not total more than $6,000 for any Employee; (iii) the other contributions set forth in Article I
are of inherently equal or greater value than the contributions required under the Plan prior to the amendment; and (iv) for 1997, the 60-day 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-7

 
election period requirement described above is deemed satisfied if the Employee may make or modify a salary reduction election during a 60-day election
period that begins no later than 30 days after the adoption of Simple 401(k) Plan provisions but in no event later than July 1, 1997. 
 4. If this Plan is a newly established 401(k) plan containing Simple 401(k) Plan provisions as
elected in Article I, the Employer may make it effective as of any date during the Plan Year, but in no event later than October 1st of the year in
which adopted. Except as described in Paragraph G.3 above, an Employer amending an existing 401(k) plan to provide for Simple 401(k) Plan provisions must make such provisions effective as of the following January 1st. 
 H. Limitation on Elective Deferrals. The Trust
shall not receive any Elective Deferrals made by an Employee to this Plan and all other plans, contracts or arrangements of the Employer in any calendar year which exceed $7,000 ($10,000 for 1999) for the Employee’s taxable year beginning in
such calendar year. If this is a Simple 401(k) Plan the limitation is $6,000 (including 1999) and the amount of Elective Contributions must be expressed as a percentage of Compensation. If Elective Deferrals in excess of the permitted amounts are
mistakenly deposited into the Trust, the correction procedures of Paragraph M of this Article IV shall apply. 
 The above dollar limitations
shall be adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as Section 415(d) of the Code, except the base period is the calendar quarter ending September 30, 1996, and any increase under this Paragraph H which is not a multiple of $500
shall be rounded to the next lowest multiple of $500. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Correction of Excess Contributions. 
 1. Return of Excess Contributions. If the Committee determines that for any Plan Year the maximum aggregate Actual Deferral Percentage of Qualifying Section 401(k) Contributions made by or on behalf of the group consisting of
Highly Compensated Employees has been exceeded, the Committee may reduce by corrective distribution to the extent necessary the amount of Excess Contributions made to the group consisting of Highly Compensated Employees to satisfy the Actual
Deferral Percentage limitation. The Committee shall designate such distributions to Highly Compensated Employees as Excess Contributions and allowable income thereof which shall be distributed to the appropriate Highly Compensated Employees after
the close of the Plan Year but not later than 12 months after the close of the Plan Year. 
 For Plan Years beginning prior to
January 1, 1997, the determination of corrective distributions shall be made in accordance with this 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-8

 
paragraph. The Committee shall reduce to the extent necessary the amount of the Excess Contributions for each member of the Highly Compensated Group by
reducing the actual deferral ratios of the Highly Compensated Employees who have the highest actual deferral ratios to the maximum acceptable level. This is accomplished by the following reduction. First, the actual deferral ratio of the Highly
Compensated Employee with the highest actual deferral ratio is reduced to the extent necessary to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation or cause such ratio to equal the actual deferral ratio of the Highly Compensated Employee with the
next highest ratio. Second, this process is repeated until the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation is satisfied. The amount of Excess Contributions for each Highly Compensated Employee is equal to the total of Elective Contributions and other
contributions taken into account for the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation prior to reduction minus the product of the Employee’s actual deferral ratio, after reduction as determined above, multiplied by his or her Compensation. 

2. Application of Family Aggregation Rules. If a Highly Compensated Employee’s actual deferral ratio is determined under the family
aggregation rules, then the reduction of the amount of his or her Excess Contributions shall be made in accordance with this paragraph. The actual deferral ratio shall be reduced in accordance with the same leveling method described in Paragraph J.1
of this Article IV. The resulting Excess Contributions for the family group shall be allocated among the Family Members in proportion to the Elective Contributions of each Family Member that are combined to determine the actual deferral ratio.

 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the determination of corrective distributions shall be made as follows:

 Step 1. The Committee shall calculate the dollar amount of Excess Contributions for each affected Highly Compensated Employee in
the same manner as the ratio leveling method described in the second paragraph of Paragraph J.1 of this Article IV. 
 Step 2. The
Committee shall determine the total of the dollar amounts calculated in step 1 (“total Excess Contributions”). 
 Step 3.
The Elective Contributions of the Highly Compensated Employee with the highest dollar amount of Elective Contributions are reduced by the amount required to cause such Highly Compensated Employee’s Elective Contributions to equal the dollar
amount of the Elective Contributions of the Highly Compensated Employee with the next highest dollar amount of Elective Contributions. This amount is then distributed to the Highly Compensated Employee with the highest dollar amount of Excess
Contributions. However, if a lesser reduction, when added to the total dollar amount already described under this step, would equal the total Excess Contributions, the lesser reduction amount is distributed. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-9

 Step 4. If the total amount distributed is less than the total Excess Contributions, step 3 is
repeated. 
 If the above distributions are made, the cash or deferred arrangement is treated as meeting the non-discrimination test of
Section 401(k)(3) of the Code regardless of whether the Actual Deferral Percentage, if recalculated after such distributions, would satisfy Section 401(k)(3) of the Code. 
 3. Corrections by Additional Contributions. The Employer may in its sole discretion and subject to the limitation contained in Article V of the
Plan, make additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions that are treated as Elective Contributions and which in combination with the Elective Contributions, satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage
limitation. Such Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions must be nonforfeitable as of the date made and subject to the same distribution restrictions that apply to Elective Contributions. Qualified Nonelective
Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions which are treated as Elective Contributions must satisfy these requirements without regard to whether they are actually taken into account as Elective Contributions. A Qualified Matching
Contribution is not treated as forfeited merely because the contribution to which it relates is an Excess Deferral, or Excess Contribution thereby causing forfeiture of such Qualified Matching Contribution. 
 4. Additional Requirements. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions which are treated as Elective
Contributions must satisfy the following additional requirements: 
 (a) The Nonelective Employer Contributions, including Qualified
Nonelective Employer Contributions, must satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1993, must satisfy Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations.

 (b) The Nonelective Employer Contributions, excluding Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated as Elective Contributions for
purposes of the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the Contribution Percentage limitation, must satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(4)
of the Code and, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1993, must satisfy Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-10

 (c) Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions made for the Plan
Year must satisfy the allocation requirements of Elective Contributions. 
 (d) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, the
plan that takes Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions into account in determining whether Elective Contributions satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation must have the same Plan Year as the plan
or plans to which the Qualified Matching Contributions and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions were made. If the Plan Year is changed to satisfy this requirement, such contributions may be taken into account during the short Plan Year if
they satisfy the allocation requirements of Elective Contributions. 
 (e) If the Employer has elected to apply the prior year testing
method to calculate the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Qualified Matching Contributions or Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the last day of the Plan Year preceding the
current Plan Year to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. If the Employer has elected to apply the current year testing method to calculate the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Qualified Matching Contributions or Qualified
Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the close of the current Plan Year to satisfy the Actual Deferral limitation. 
 5. Recharacterization of Excess Contributions. If Article I allows for Employee After-Tax
Contributions, the Committee may recharacterize Excess Contributions as Employee After-Tax Contributions. Such recharacterized contributions shall remain subject to the nonforfeitable requirements and distribution limitations that apply to Elective
Contributions. The Committee cannot recharacterize any Excess Contributions after 2 1/2 months after the close of
the Plan Year. Further Excess Contributions will not be recharacterized with respect to a Highly Compensated Employee to the extent that the recharacterized amounts, in combination with Employee After-Tax Contributions actually made by the Employee,
exceeds a maximum amount of Employee After-Tax Contributions that the Employee is permitted to make under the Plan in the absence of recharacterization determined prior to the application of the Contribution Percentage limitation. Such
recharacterized amounts will be considered as Annual Additions under the limitations imposed by Section 415 of the Code and shall be subject to Section 401(m) of the Code. The same leveling method and family aggregation rules as described
with respect to the return of Excess Contributions to Highly Compensated Employees shall apply to this corrective procedure. 
 The
amount of Excess Contributions to be recharacterized for a Plan Year shall not exceed the amount of Elective Contributions made on behalf of such Highly Compensated Employee. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-11

 6. Correction of Excess Contributions by Reduction Prior to the End of the Plan Year. If the
Committee determines that the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation is being exceeded during a Plan Year, the Committee may suspend the group of Highly Compensated Employees’ future Elective Deferrals of Qualifying 401(k) Contributions for such
Plan Year to enable the Plan to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. The Committee shall give notice to such Employees of the amount to be suspended. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the determination of the reduction shall be made either in accordance with the dollar leveling method used for reduction of Excess Contributions or on a pro rata
basis if elected in Article I. 
 For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1997, the determination of the reduction shall be made
either in accordance with the same leveling method and family aggregation rules used for the reduction of Excess Contributions or on a pro rata basis as elected in Article I. 
 K. Coordination of Excess Contributions with Excess Deferrals. The amount of Excess Contributions to be distributed or recharacterized with
respect to Highly Compensated Employees shall be reduced by any Excess Deferrals previously distributed to such Employee for the Employee’s taxable year ending in such Plan Year. 
 L. Income Allowable to Excess Contribution. The distribution of Excess Contributions shall include the income allocated thereto. The income
allocable to Excess Contributions is determined by applying the same method as used for the correction of Excess Aggregate Contributions described in Paragraph J of Article X. 
 M. Correction of Excess Deferrals. Not later than the first April 15th after the close of the Employee’s taxable year, the
Employee must notify the Committee of each Plan under which deferrals were made, how much Excess Deferrals were received by such plan and each plan may distribute to the Employee the amount of Excess Deferrals plus any earnings thereof. An Employee
may receive a corrective distribution of Excess Deferrals during the same taxable year. A corrective distribution may be made only if all of the following conditions are satisfied: 
 1. The Employee designates the distribution as an Excess Deferral. An Employee is deemed to have designated the distribution as an Excess Deferral to the
extent the Employee has Excess Deferrals for the taxable year, taking into account only Elective Deferrals under this Plan and any other plan maintained by the Employer. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-12

 2. The corrective distribution is made after the date in which the plan received the Excess Deferral.

 3. The plan designates the distribution as a distribution of Excess Deferrals. 
 N. Income Allowable to Excess Deferrals. The distribution of Excess Deferrals shall include the income allocated thereto. The income
allocable to Excess Deferrals for the taxable year is determined by applying the same method as used for correction of Excess Aggregate Contributions described in Paragraph J of Article X. 
 O. Coordination of Excess Deferrals with Distribution or Recharacterization of Excess Contributions. The amount of Excess Deferrals that
may be distributable with respect to an Employee for a taxable year shall be reduced by any Excess Contributions previously distributed or recharacterized with respect to such Employee for the Plan Year beginning with or within such taxable year. In
the event of reduction under this Paragraph O, the amount of Excess Contributions included in the gross income of the Employee and reported by the Employer as a distribution of Excess Contributions shall be reduced by the amount of the reduction
under this paragraph. The amount of the reduction under this Paragraph O shall be reported as a distribution of Excess Deferrals. In no case may an Employee receive from the Plan as a corrective distribution for a taxable year an Excess Deferral
which exceeds the Employee’s total Elective Deferrals under the Plan for the Employee’s taxable year. 
 P. Distribution of
Amounts Attributed to Elective Contributions. Except for the correction of Excess Contributions, Excess Aggregate Contributions and Excess Deferrals, Elective Contributions, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions, and Qualified
Matching Contributions and earnings resulting from these contributions may not be distributed earlier than upon one (1) of the following events: 
 1. The Employee’s retirement, death, disability or separation from service; 
 2. The termination of the
Plan without establishment or maintenance of another defined contribution plan (other than an employer stock ownership plan, a simple IRA plan or a simple employer plan); 
 3. The Employee’s attainment of age 59 1/2; 
 4. Distributions on account of
hardship. For Plan Years after December 31, 1988 only amounts deferred by the Employee as Elective Contributions, disregarding any gains or losses, may be distributed; provided, however, that in no event shall the amount of such hardship
distribution result in a value less than zero (0) in a Participant’s Elective Contribution Account determined as of the immediately preceding Valuation Date; 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-13

 5. The sale or disposition by a corporation to an unrelated corporation, which does not maintain the
Plan, of substantially all of the assets used in a trade or business but only with respect to Employees who continue employment with the acquiring corporation; and 
 6. The sale or other dispositions by a corporation of its interest in a subsidiary to an unrelated corporate entity which does not maintain the Plan, but only with respect to Employees who continue employment with a
subsidiary. 
 For purposes of (5) and (6) above, distributions may also be
made on account of certain dispositions of assets or subsidiaries other than sales. These distributions on account of dispositions or sales may be made only if the transferor corporation continues to maintain the Plan after disposition. The
distribution must be a lump-sum distribution in order for the exceptions for disposition of assets or subsidiaries or for termination of the Plan to apply. Lump-sum, for these purposes, is a lump-sum under Section 402(d)(4) of the Code but
without regard to (i) the attainment of age 59 1/2; (ii) the election requirement; or (iii) the
minimum period of a plan participation requirement. 
 These lump-sum rules apply to distributions occurring after March 31,
1988. 
 Q. Hardship Withdrawals. If allowed under Article I of this Plan, the Participant may apply for a hardship withdrawal of his
or her Elective Contributions or Nonelective Employer Contributions, if applicable, by filing a written application with the Committee. In granting a hardship withdrawal, the Committee shall follow nondiscriminatory and objective standards in
determining whether a Participant is entitled to a hardship withdrawal. 
 1. General Rule. Any hardship withdrawal may only be made if
it is necessary to satisfy an immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant. A hardship withdrawal shall not exceed the amount necessary to relieve the need nor shall such hardship withdrawal be made to the extent the need may be satisfied
from other financial resources reasonably available to the Employee. 
 2. Determination of Financial Need. A withdrawal on account of
hardship may be treated as necessary to satisfy a financial need if the Committee reasonably relies upon the Employee’s representation that the need cannot be relieved by: 
 (a) Reimbursement or compensation by insurance or otherwise; 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-14

 (b) Reasonable liquidation of the Employee’s assets to the extent such liquidation would not itself
cause any immediate and heavy financial need; 
 (c) Cessation of Elective Contributions or Employee Contributions under the Plans of the
Employer; or 
 (d) Other distributions or nontaxable loans from plans maintained by the Employer, or by any other Employer, or by borrowing
from commercial sources on reasonable commercial terms. An Employee’s resources shall be deemed to include those assets of his or her Spouse and minor children that are reasonably available to the Employee. 
 3. Determination of Necessity for Hardship Withdrawal. A hardship withdrawal will be deemed necessary to satisfy the financial need if it meets
the following conditions: 
 (a) The hardship withdrawal is not in excess of the amount of the immediate and heavy financial need of the
Employee. The amount of an immediate and heavy financial need may include amounts necessary to pay any federal, state or local income taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from such hardship withdrawal. 
 (b) The Employee has obtained all distributions, other than hardship withdrawals of Elective Contributions, and all nontaxable loans currently available
under all plans maintained by the Employer. 
 (c) The Employee’s Elective Contributions and Employee After-Tax Contributions, other
than mandatory Employee contributions made to a defined benefit plan, will be suspended for at least 12 months after receipt of the hardship withdrawal under this Plan and all other qualified and non-qualified plans of deferred compensation,
including the cash and deferred arrangement that is part of a cafeteria plan and excluding any health or welfare plans, including one that is part of a cafeteria plan, maintained by the Employer. 
 (d) The Employee may not make Elective Contributions and Employee After-Tax Contributions, other than mandatory Employee contributions made to a defined
benefit plan, to this Plan and all other qualified and non-qualified plans of deferred compensation, including the cash and deferred arrangement that is part of a cafeteria plan and excluding any health or welfare plans, including one that is part
of a cafeteria plan, maintained by the Employer for the Employee’s taxable year immediately following the taxable year of the hardship withdrawal in excess of the applicable limit under Section 402(g) of the Code for such next taxable year
less the amount of such Elective Contributions for the taxable year of the hardship withdrawal. With respect to 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-15

 
hardship withdrawals made on or before March 31, 1989, operation in accordance with the IRS Regulations proposed on November 10, 1981 is a
reasonable interpretation of Section 401(k) of the Code. 
 R. Aggregation of Employer’s Plans. Elective
Contributions that are made under two (2) or more plans of the Employer that are aggregated for purposes of Section 401(a)(4) or Section 410(b) of the Code, other than Section 410(b)(2)(A)(ii) of the Code, are to be treated as
made under a single plan and if two (2) or more plans are permissibly aggregated for purposes of Section 401(k) of the Code, the aggregated plans must satisfy Sections 401(a)(4), 401(k) and 410(b) of the Code as though such aggregated
plans were a single plan. Whenever a Highly Compensated Employee is eligible under two (2) or more plans of the Employer which are subject to Section 401(k) of the Code, in calculating the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, the actual
deferral ratio of such Highly Compensated Employee will be determined by treating all such plans in which such Highly Compensated Employee is an Eligible Participant as a single plan. 
 Except for certain plans in existence on November 1, 1977, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, contributions allocated under a
plan described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code cannot be combined with contributions or allocations under any plan not described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code including required aggregation of a Highly Compensated Employee. However,
a plan described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code may provide for contributions as described in Section 401(k)(12) of the Code. Mandatory disaggregation shall also apply to plans described under Sections 1.401(k)-1(b)(3)(ii)(B) and
1.401(k)-1(g)(11)(iii) of the Treasury Regulations. However, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1990, for purposes of the average benefit percentage test under Section 410(b)(2)(A)(ii) of the Code, a plan described in
Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code shall be aggregated. For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1991, the Employer shall have the option to aggregate such plans for purposes of the average benefit percentage test. Plans that are to be
aggregated may only be aggregated if they have the same plan year. 
 The rules regarding aggregation and disaggregation of cash or deferred
arrangements and plans shall also apply for purposes of Sections 401(k)(12) and 401(m)(11) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IV	  	 IV-16

 V. ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS 
 A. Maintenance of Accounts. The Committee shall, where applicable, establish and maintain a Nonelective Employer Contribution Account,
Elective Contribution Account, Employee After-Tax Contribution Account, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution Account, Matching Contribution Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account, Rollover Contribution Account, Safe Harbor Matching
Contribution Account, Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contribution Account, Simple 401(k) Account and/or Transferred Benefits Account in the name of each Participant. 
 B. Valuation of Trust. 
 1. Date for Valuation. As soon as administratively feasible after any
Valuation Date, the Trustee shall value the Trust assets and liabilities on the basis of fair market values as of such Valuation Date. 
 2.
Instructions for Valuation. If the Trustee, in making such valuations, shall determine that the Trust consists, in whole or in part, of property not traded freely on a recognized market, or that information necessary to ascertain the fair
market value of any Trust assets or liabilities is not readily available to the Trustee, the Trustee may request the Committee to instruct the Trustee as to such fair market value for all purposes under the Plan; and in such event the fair market
value determined by the Committee shall be binding and conclusive. If the Committee fails or refuses to instruct the Trustee as to such fair market value within a reasonable time after receipt of the Trustee’s request, the Trustee shall take
such action as it deems necessary or advisable to ascertain such fair market value, including the retention of such counsel and independent appraisers as it considers necessary; and in such event the fair market value determined by the Trustee shall
be binding and conclusive. The expenses incurred in retaining such counsel and/or independent appraisers shall be paid by the Trust. 
 C.
Allocation of Trust Earnings. 
 1. General. As of each Valuation Date and prior to the allocation of Employer
contributions, Employee After-Tax Contributions and, if applicable, forfeitures for the Plan Year, the Committee shall allocate the increment of Trust net income to or charge Trust net losses against, as the case may be, the respective Accounts of
the Participants in proportion to the balances (minus any distributions made to the Participant and any forfeitures declared in such Account after the immediately preceding Valuation Date) of such Accounts as of the immediately preceding Valuation
Date. 
 2. Segregated and Directed Accounts. Notwithstanding the foregoing, segregated Accounts of a Participant held in accordance
with the provisions of 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE V	  	 V-1

 
Paragraph B.4(a) of Article VII and Paragraph B of Article XII, if provided for in Article I, shall be valued separately on each Valuation Date, and the
increment of Trust net income shall be allocated to or Trust net loss shall be charged against, as the case may be, such Accounts on a segregated basis. 
 3. Elective Contribution Accounts. Unless otherwise elected in Paragraph LL, Elective
Contributions made by a Participant and deposited periodically throughout a Plan Year to his or her Elective Contribution Account shall have allocated to them a proportionate share of Trust net income or net losses attributable to all such Elective
Contribution Accounts on the basis of one-half ( 1/2) of the total amount of periodic payment Elective
Contributions made by all Participants and deposited during the Plan Year determined as if such Elective Contributions were deposited on the first day of the Plan Year. For purposes of this Paragraph C.3, periodic payments shall mean substantially
equal payments made throughout the Plan Year not less frequently than quarterly. A single-sum deposit made by a Participant as an Elective Contribution to his or her Elective Contribution Account during the first quarter of the Plan Year will
receive an allocation of Trust net income and net losses for the entire Plan Year as if such deposit were made on the first day of the Plan Year. Lump-sum deposits made in the second, third or fourth quarter of a Plan Year shall not be entitled to
receive an allocation of Trust net income or net losses. The frequency or method with which Trust net income and net losses are allocated to the Elective Contribution Accounts may be changed in the discretion of the Committee, but only in a uniform
and nondiscriminatory manner. 
 D. Allocation to Contribution Accounts. 
 1. General. Amounts contributed by the Employer for any Plan Year (and, if applicable, any previously unallocated forfeitures) shall be allocated
to the appropriate Accounts in accordance with the manner provided in Article I as of each Anniversary Date. 
 If this Plan provides for
permitted disparity, then for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1995, the number of years credited to the Participant for allocation or accrual purposes under this Plan, any other qualified plan or simplified employee pension plan
(whether or not terminated) ever maintained by the Employer shall be limited to a total cumulation of permitted disparity of 35 years. For purposes of determining the participant’s cumulative permitted disparity limit, all years ending in the
same calendar year are treated as the same year. If the Participant has not benefited under a defined benefit or target benefit plan for any year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the Participant has no cumulative disparity limit.

 2. Allocations on Retirement, Total Disability or Death. An individual whose participation ceased during the year because of
termination of employment on or 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE V	  	 V-2

 
after Normal Retirement Age, death or Total Disability may be entitled to an allocation of Employer contributions without regard to service or employment
date requirements as provided in Article I. 
 3. Allocation of Elective, Employee After-Tax, Safe Harbor Matching, Safe Harbor
Nonelective Employer, and Simple 401(k) Contributions. Allocation of Elective Contributions, Employee After-Tax Contributions, Safe Harbor Matching Contributions, Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions and/or Simple 401(k) Contributions
shall be allocated to those Eligible Participants described in Article I of the Plan without regard to service or employment date requirements provided in Article I in regard to the allocation requirements of other Employer contributions.

 4. Suspension of Benefits if Participant Changes Employee Status. If a Participant continues in the employ of the Employer, but
changes his or her employment status to a class of employees that is ineligible for participation, such termination of participation shall not constitute a termination of employment for purposes of this Plan. An otherwise eligible Participant shall
accrue benefits in the Plan for the Plan Year in which he or she changes his or her employment status based on his or her Compensation received before the change in status. However, such Inactive Participant shall not accrue further benefits under
the Plan until the date he or she again becomes a Participant; provided, however, that Compensation received prior to his or her again becoming a Participant shall be disregarded. 
 5. Amendments to The Plan – Preservation of Accrued Benefit. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Plan, no amendment to
the Plan shall be effective to the extent that it has the effect of (i) decreasing a Participant’s Accrued Benefit derived from Employer contributions; or (ii) except as provided by Treasury Regulations, eliminating an optional form
of benefit, with respect to benefits attributable to Years of Service before the amendment; provided, however, that a Participant’s Accrued Benefit may be reduced to the extent required as a condition of meeting the standards for qualification
of the Plan. Furthermore, no amendment to the Plan shall have the effect of decreasing a Participant’s vested interest in his or her Accrued Benefit determined without regard to such amendment as of the later of the date such amendment was
adopted, or becomes effective. 
 E. Limitation on Allocation of Employer Contributions and Forfeitures. 
 1. Dollar Amount and Percentage Limitations. The Annual Addition to a Participant’s Employer Contribution Account and Employee After-Tax
Contribution Account shall not exceed the lesser of: 
 (a) The Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation; or 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE V	  	 V-3

 (b) 25% of the Participant’s Section 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year; provided,
however, that this compensation limitation shall not apply to: 
 (i) Any contribution for medical benefits (within the meaning of
Section 419A(f)(2) of the Code) after separation from service which is otherwise treated as an Annual Addition; or 
 (ii) Any amount
otherwise treated as an Annual Addition under Section 415(l)(1) of the Code. 
 2. Multiple Defined Contribution Plans and Welfare
Benefit Fund Limitation. If, in a Plan Year, a Participant also participates in a defined contribution plan or a welfare benefit fund maintained by the Employer or by another member of the Controlled Group, the limitations set forth in this
Article V with respect to such Participant shall apply as if the Annual Additions accrued to such Participant under all defined contribution plans and welfare benefit funds in which the Participant has participated were derived from one Plan.

 3. Rule of 1.0. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Plan, the following additional limitations shall apply
to any Participant who is or was covered by a defined benefit pension plan, whether or not terminated, maintained by the Employer (or a member of a Controlled Group): (i) the amount of the Annual Addition to such Participant’s Employer
Contribution Account shall be reduced by the Committee to the extent necessary to prevent the sum of the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction for such Plan Year from exceeding 1.0 (profit sharing plans shall be
reduced first, then other defined contribution plans and, finally, defined benefit pension plan(s) unless Article I designates the defined benefit pension plan(s) to be reduced first); and (ii) for the purpose of applying the limitation of this
Rule of 1.0, the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction shall be applied in a manner consistent with the provisions of Section 415 of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder; provided,
however, that for any Plan Year ending after December 31, 1982, the Employer may elect to have the transitional rule of Section 415(e)(6) of the Code applied in computing the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction; provided, further, however,
that if the Plan satisfied the requirements of Section 415 of the Code for the last Plan Year beginning before January 1,1983, the Plan shall satisfy this Paragraph E.3 to the extent necessary by complying with Treasury Regulations
promulgated under Section 235(g)(3) of TEFRA. 
 If the Plan satisfied the applicable requirements of Section 415 of the Code as
in effect for all Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 1987, an amount shall be subtracted from the numerator of the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction (not exceeding such numerator) as prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury so
that the sum of the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and Defined Contribution Plan Fraction computed under Section 415(e)(1) of the Code does not exceed 1.0 for such Limitation Year. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE V	  	 V-4

 For Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1999, the Rule of 1.0 described above shall no
longer apply. 
 F. Allocation Priorities if Limitations Exceeded. If the Annual Addition for a Participant is exceeded due to
the allocation of forfeitures, a reasonable error in estimating a Participant’s Compensation, or a reasonable error in determining the amount of Elective Deferrals with respect to any Plan Year, then compliance with such limitation shall be
accomplished as follows. First, the amount of the Participant’s Employee After-Tax Contributions for that Plan Year which were included in the Annual Addition shall be refunded to him or her; second, any Elective Deferrals shall be refunded to
the Participant to the extent the distribution would reduce the excess amount in the Participant’s Account; third, the excess of Employer contributions which cannot be allocated to any Participant for such Plan Year shall either be
(i) allocated to the remaining Participants’ Accounts with any remaining unallocable Annual Additions held in a suspense account to reduce Employer Contributions for the subsequent Limitation Year; or (ii) held in suspense accounts
and applied to reduce future Employer contributions during the next Limitation Year, as elected in Article I. 
 G. Key Man Insurance
Proceeds. Any proceeds of key man insurance received by the Trust during any Plan Year shall be allocated to the Employer Contribution Accounts of the Participants who are otherwise eligible to receive an allocation of Employer
contributions on the Anniversary Date of the Plan Year in which the insured died. Such proceeds shall be allocated to each Participant in the ratio that each Participant’s Employer Contribution Account as of the first day of the Plan Year in
which the proceeds are received bears to the value of all such Participants’ Employer Contribution Accounts. The allocation of such amounts shall be treated as an investment gain of the Trust. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE V	  	 V-5

 VI. VESTING AND BENEFIT ENTITLEMENT 
 A. Vesting. The Accrued Benefit credited to any Participant shall vest in him or her as follows: 
 1. Full Vesting. A Participant’s Accrued Benefit shall be fully vested at his or her Normal Retirement Age. A Participant will become fully
vested no later than the later of the Participant’s 65th birthday or the fifth anniversary commencing the participation under the Plan. Such Accrued Benefit shall also be fully vested upon a complete discontinuance of Employer Contributions or
complete or partial termination of the Plan to the extent provided in Paragraph B of Article XIV. 
 2. Qualifying Section 401(k)
Contributions. A Participant shall be fully vested in his or her Elective Contribution, Qualifying Matching Contribution and Qualifying Nonelective Contribution Accounts at all times. 
 3. Safe Harbor Contributions. A Participant shall be fully vested in his or her Safe Harbor Matching Contribution and Safe Harbor Nonelection
Employer Contribution Accounts at all times. 
 4. Simple 401(k) Contributions. A Participant shall be fully vested in his or her
Simple 401(k) Account at all times. 
 5. Partial Vesting. The Nonelective Employer Contributions and Matching Contributions of a
Participant whose employment terminates, or who suffers a Break-in-Service prior to his or her Normal Retirement Age for reasons other than death or Total Disability, shall vest in him or her in accordance with the vesting provisions contained in
Article I. 
 6. Vesting with the Controlled Group. If the Employer is a member of a Controlled Group, then Vesting credit shall be
granted to an Employee for each Year of Service completed with the Employer and each other member of the Controlled Group. 
 B.
Forfeitures. Non-vested Accrued Benefits shall be forfeited in accordance with the following provisions: 
 1. Cash-Out of $5,000 or
Less. Subject to Paragraph B.3 of this Article VI, effective for Plan Years beginning after August 5, 1997, a Participant who terminates employment with the Employer in any Plan Year with a vested Accrued Benefit equal to or less than
$5,000, will be paid a distribution of the value of his or her entire vested Accrued Benefit as soon as administratively feasible after the event elected in Article I and the non-vested Accrued Benefit will be immediately forfeited unless a later
date for the forfeiture of non-vested Accrued Benefits is elected in 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VI	  	 VI-1

 
Article I. For purposes of this Paragraph B.1, if the value of a Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit is zero (0), the Participant shall be deemed to
have received a distribution of such zero (0) vested Accrued Benefit immediately upon employment termination or, if later, at the time the forfeiture occurs as elected in Article I. 
 2. Cash-Out of More Than $5,000. Subject to Paragraph B.3 of this Article VI, effective for Plan Years beginning after August 5, 1997, a
Participant who terminates employment with the Employer with a vested Accrued Benefit greater than $5,000, may elect to receive the entire value of his or her vested Accrued Benefit as soon as administratively feasible after the event elected in
Article I, and the non-vested Accrued Benefit will be immediately forfeited unless a later date for the forfeiture of non-vested Accrued Benefits is elected in Article I. 
 3. $3,500 Cash-Out. If and to the extent elected in Article I, the involuntary cash-out limit of $5,000 described above shall be $3,500. 
 4. Partial Cash-Outs of Vested Benefits. If the Participant receives a distribution of less than his or her entire vested Accrued Benefit during a
Plan Year, the portion of the non-vested Accrued Benefit that will be immediately forfeited (unless Article I does not provide for a forfeiture of a partial cash-out distribution or a later date for the forfeiture of non-vested Accrued Benefits is
elected in Article I) is the total non-vested Accrued Benefit multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the vested Accrued Benefit that was distributed and the denominator of which is the total vested Accrued Benefit.

 5. Rehire After Cash-Out. If a Participant receives a distribution pursuant to Paragraphs B.1, B.2, or B.3 of this Article VI,
resumes employment covered under this Plan and, if required by Article I, repays to the Plan the full amount distributed to the Participant before the earlier of five (5) years after the first date on which the Participant is subsequently
re-employed by the Employer, or the date on which the Participant incurs five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service following the date of the previous distribution, then the amount that was forfeited shall be restored. If a terminated
Participant who had no vested Accrued Benefit and was deemed to have received a distribution later resumes covered employment before the date the Participant incurs five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service, the amount that was previously
forfeited by such Participant will be restored to his or her account. 
 6. Delayed Forfeiture. If the Employer elects in Article I to
delay forfeiture of non-vested Accrued Benefits until after the Plan Year of distribution, the separate account rule in Paragraph C of this Article VI shall apply until the forfeiture actually occurs. If the forfeiture occurs prior to five
(5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service, then the above rules of this Paragraph B will apply after Paragraph C of this Article VI no longer applies. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VI	  	 VI-2

 7. Separate Account on In-Service Distribution. If this Plan allows for a distribution on account
of hardship or other in-service distributions at any time when a Participant has a non-forfeitable right to less than 100% of the Accrued Benefit, and the Participant may increase the non-forfeitable percentage in his or her Account, a separate
account as provided in Paragraph C of this Article VI will be established for the non-vested portion of the Accrued Benefit of the Participant who receives an in-service distribution. 
 8. Accumulated Deductible Contributions. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, a Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit shall
include accumulated deductible employee contributions within the meaning of Section 72(o)(5)(B) of the Code for purposes of the cash-out provisions of this Article VI. 
 C. Re-Vesting in Forfeitures Upon Re-Employment. If a Participant receives a distribution of his or her vested Accrued Benefit at a time
when such Participant’s vested interest is less than 100% and if, at the time of payment to the Participant, the Participant’s non-vested benefit has not been forfeited, a separate account shall be established for the non-vested portion of
the Participant’s interest in the Plan as of the time of the distribution, and if he or she returns to the employ of the Employer prior to the time he or she suffers five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service or an earlier forfeitable
event as elected in Article I, then at any “Relevant Time” the Participant’s vested portion of the separate account shall be an amount (“X”) determined by the formula X = P(AB + D) – D or if elected in Article I
determined by the formula X=P(AB+(RxD))-(RxD). For purposes of applying either formula, P is the vested percentage at the Relevant Time; AB is the account balance at the Relevant Time; D is the amount of the distribution; and R is the ratio of the
account balance at the Relevant Time to the account balance after distribution. If a Participant returns to the employ of the Employer prior to incurring five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service, or an earlier forfeitable event, he or
she shall continue on the vesting schedule set forth in Paragraph A.5 of this Article VI as if he or she had not left, and he or she shall be a Participant as of his or her date of rehire. 
 D. Limitation on Vesting Upon Re-Employment. If a terminated Participant is re-employed by the Employer, then, except as provided for in
this Article VI, all of the Participant’s Years of Service before his or her re-employment shall be considered as Years of Service after his or her re-employment for the purpose of determining the Participant’s Accrued Benefit under the
Plan derived from Employer contributions allocated to the Participant subsequent to his or her date of re-employment. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VI	  	 VI-3

 E. Vesting Upon Change of Employment Status. If a Participant becomes an Inactive
Participant, his or her Accrued Benefit shall continue to vest as long as he or she is an Employee of the Employer or its Controlled Group and has not incurred a Break-in-Service. 
 F. Vested Interest Not Distributed. If a terminated Participant has not received a distribution or a deemed distribution of his or her
vested Accrued Benefit, then his or her Accrued Benefit shall be credited with its share of Trust net earnings, gains, or losses and changes in the fair market value of the Trust assets through the Valuation Date next preceding actual distribution
and forfeitures, if any. 
 G. Break-in-Service While Still Employed. If a Participant incurs a Break-in-Service but does not
terminate employment with the Employer, his or her Accrued Benefit shall remain in the Trust and shall be credited with its share of Trust net earnings, gains, or losses and changes in the fair market value through the Valuation Date next preceding
distribution and forfeitures, if any. 
 H. Effect of Break-in-Service – Vested Participant. If a Participant has five
(5) consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service, he or she shall not have credited to him or her Years of Service accrued subsequent to such Break-in-Service for purposes of determining his or her vested interest in his or her Accrued Benefit
derived from Employer contributions credited prior to such Break-in-Service. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Effect of Break-in-Service – Non-Vested Participant. If a Participant does not have a vested interest in any portion of his or her
Accrued Benefit at the time a Break-in-Service occurs, Years of Service prior to the Break-in-Service shall not be taken into account in determining the Participant’s vested interest in his or her Accrued Benefit if the number of consecutive
one-year Breaks-in-Service equals or exceeds the greater of five (5) or the aggregate number of Years of Service prior to the Break-in-Service. 
 If a former Participant has five (5) or more consecutive one-year Breaks-in-Service, his or her Years of Service prior to such Breaks-in-Service shall be taken into account in determining the former
Participant’s vested interest in his or her Accrued benefit only if either: 
 1. Such former Participant had a vested interest in his or
her Accrued Benefit at the time of his or her termination of employment; or 
 2. Upon his or her re-employment, the number of consecutive
one-year Breaks-in-Service is less than the number of Years of Service completed prior to the Break-in-Service. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VI	  	 VI-4

 Separate Accounts shall be maintained for the Participant’s pre-Break and post-Break Accrued Benefit
and both Accounts shall share in the allocation of Trust earnings and losses as provided in Article V of the Plan. 
 With respect to any
former Participant whose prior service is not disregarded under the break-in-service rules in effect prior to the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1984, whether the Plan may subsequently disregard the years of service is governed by
the provisions of this Paragraph J. 
 K. Limitation on Right to Amend Vesting Schedule. Any amendment changing the vesting
schedule shall: 
 1. Not cause any Participant’s vested interest in such Participant’s Accrued Benefit to be less than such
Participant’s vested interest on the day before such amendment becomes effective; and 
 2. Permit any Participant having at least three
(3) Years of Service the option to elect, irrevocably, within a reasonable period after the adoption of such amendment, to have such Participant’s vested interest determined without regard to said amendment (that is, in accordance with the
vesting schedule in effect prior to such amendment). The election period shall begin on the date the amendment is adopted and end not earlier than 60 days after the latest of (i) the adoption date; (ii) the effective date; or
(iii) the date written notice of the right of election is given to the Participant. 
 3. If a Participant does not elect a vesting
schedule, then he or she will vest in accordance with the most favorable vesting schedule. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VI	  	 VI-5

 VII. DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS 
 A. Definitions. 
 1.
“Annuity Starting Date” means the first day of the first period for which an amount is payable as an annuity to a Participant, or in the case of a benefit not payable in the form of an annuity, the first day on which all events have
occurred which entitle the Participant to a benefit. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the first day of the first period for which a benefit is to be received on account of separation from service by reason of disability shall be treated as
the Annuity Starting Date only if such disability benefit is not an auxiliary benefit. 
 2. “Election Period” means, with
respect to a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, the 90-day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date. With respect to a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity, Election Period means the period beginning on the first day of the Plan Year in
which Participant attains age 35 and ending on the date of the Participant’s death. If a Participant separates from service prior to age 35, the Election Period shall begin on the date of separation from service with respect to benefits accrued
as of that date. 
 A Participant who has not attained age 35 as of the end of any Plan Year may make a special Waiver Election to waive the
Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity for the period beginning on the date of such election and ending on the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant will attain age 35. Such election will not be valid unless the Participant receives
a written explanation of the Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity. The Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity coverage will be automatically reinstated as of the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35. Any new
Waiver Election on or after such date shall be subject to the full requirements of this Article VII. 
 3. “Qualified Joint and
Survivor Annuity” means, with respect to a married Participant, an immediate annuity for the life of the Participant with a survivor annuity for the life of his or her Spouse which is 50%, or a greater percentage as elected in Article I, of
the amount of the annuity paid for the joint lives of the Participant and his or her Spouse and which is the actuarial equivalent of a single annuity for the life of the Participant. 
 With respect to an unmarried Participant, a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity means an annuity for the life of the Participant. 
 4. “Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity” means an immediate annuity for the life of the Participant’s Spouse, the payment
under which is equal to 50%, or a greater percentage as elected in Article I, of the sum of the Participant’s 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-1

 
Accrued Benefit and any insurance proceeds payable upon death of the Participant; any security interest held by the Plan by reason of an outstanding loan to
the Participant shall be taken into account in determining the amount of the Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity. 
 5.
“Spouse” or “Surviving Spouse” means a person who has been married to the Participant throughout the one-year period (unless otherwise elected in Article I) ending on the earlier of the date of the
Participant’s death or such Participant’s Annuity Starting Date; provided, however, that a former Spouse shall be treated as the Spouse or Surviving Spouse to the extent required under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. The one-year
marriage requirement does not apply to the payment of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. 
 6. “Transferred Benefits”
mean the benefits of a Participant derived from another qualified plan that are involuntarily transferred to this Plan subject to the requirements of Section 414(l) of the Code and, where applicable, the annuity and survivor annuity
requirements of Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code. A Participant shall vest in his or her Transferred Benefits Account in accordance with Article I, but subject to the vesting requirements of Section 411(a)(10) of the Code. A rollover and
voluntary transfer described in Q&A 3 of Section 1.411(d)-4 of the Treasury Regulations will not be deemed a transfer of benefits. 
 7. “Waiver Election” means a written election by a Participant during the Election Period to receive the payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a manner other than a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity
or a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity. A Waiver Election must be consented to by the Participant’s Spouse. The Spouse’s consent must acknowledge the effect of the waiver and must be witnessed by either the Plan representative or a
notary public as required at the sole discretion of the Committee. The Spouse’s consent will be deemed made if the Participant establishes to the satisfaction of the Committee that (i) there is no Spouse; or (ii) the Spouse cannot be
located. If the Spouse is legally incompetent to give consent, the Spouse’s legal guardian, even if the guardian is the Participant, may give consent. Also, if the Participant is legally separated or the Participant has been abandoned (within
the meaning of local law) and the Participant has a court order to such effect, spousal consent is not required unless a Qualified Domestic Relations Order provides otherwise. Similar rules apply to a plan subject to the requirements of
Section 401(a)(11)(B)(iii)(l) of the Code. Any consent made or deemed made hereunder shall be valid only with respect to the Spouse who signs, or is deemed to have signed, the consent. The Waiver Election of a Qualified Preretirement Survivor
Annuity shall identify the Beneficiary or class of Beneficiaries or any contingent Beneficiaries. The Waiver Election of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall identify the Beneficiary or class of Beneficiaries or contingent Beneficiary, if
applicable, and the method of payment. Any change in the Waiver Election shall require a new 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-2

 
spousal consent, unless the original consent of the Spouse expressly permits designations by the Participant without any requirement of further consent by
the Spouse and acknowledges that the more restrictive consent could have been given. A revocation of a prior waiver may be made by a Participant without the consent of the Spouse at any time before the Annuity Starting Date. The Participant may
revoke a Waiver Election at any time, but any new Waiver Election must comply with the requirements of this Paragraph A.7. A former Spouse’s consent to a Waiver Election shall not be binding on a new Spouse. 
 B. Distribution With Annuity Option – Other Than Death. If this Plan provides for an annuity option as selected in Article I, the
Committee shall direct the Trustee to distribute to a Participant the amount of his or her vested Accrued Benefit as a result of the Participant’s termination of employment, including (i) termination of employment for any reason other than
death; (ii) Total Disability before Normal Retirement Age; or (iii) retirement on or after Normal Retirement Age in accordance with this Paragraph B. Such Accrued Benefit shall be determined as of the Valuation Date preceding the date of
the Participant’s distribution. 
 1. Payment of Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. A Participant shall automatically receive
his or her vested Accrued Benefit in the form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity unless the Participant makes a Waiver Election during the applicable Election Period. 
 2. Notice Requirements. The Committee shall provide to each Participant within a period of time of no less than 30 days and no more than 90 days
prior to the Annuity Starting Date, a written explanation of (i) the terms and conditions of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity; (ii) the Participant’s right to make, and the effect of, a Waiver Election waiving the Qualified
Joint and Survivor form of benefit; (iii) the rights of a Spouse to consent to any Waiver Election which waives his or her rights to such form of Annuity; and (iv) the right to make, and the effect of, a revocation of a previously made
Waiver Election. 
 The Participant shall be furnished with a general description of all the eligibility conditions and other material
features of the optional forms of benefits and information explaining the relative values of the various optional forms of benefits that are available under the terms of the Plan in a like manner and within the time period as stated in the preceding
paragraph. The requirement to provide relative values of the optional forms of benefits shall only apply to plans that offer a life annuity form of payment. Written consent of the Participant to a distribution must be made after the Participant
receives such notice and must not be made more than 90 days before the Annuity Starting Date. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-3

 (a) If a distribution is one to which Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code do not apply, such
distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice required under Section 1.411(a)-11(c) of the Income Tax Regulations is given, provided that: 
 (i) The Committee clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if
applicable, a particular distribution option); and 
 (ii) The Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.

 (b) If a distribution is one to which Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code apply, such distribution may commence less than 30 days
after the notice is given provided that: 
 (i) The Committee provides information to the Participant clearly indicating that the Participant
has a right to at least 30 days to consider whether to waive the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and consent to a form of distribution other than a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity; 
 (ii) The Participant is permitted to revoke an affirmative distribution election at least until the Annuity Starting Date, or if later, at any time
prior to the expiration of the seven (7) day period that begins the day after the explanation of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant; 
 (iii) The Annuity Starting Date is after the date that the explanation of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant.
However, for distributions made after December 31, 1996, the Annuity Starting Date may be before the date that the written explanation is given to the Participant, provided that the distribution does not commence until at least 30 days after
such written explanation is provided to such Participant; and 
 (iv) Distribution in accordance with the affirmative election does not
commence before the expiration of the seven (7) day period that begins the day after the explanation of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant. 
 3. Alternate Forms of Benefit Payments. During any time that a Waiver Election is in effect, the Participant shall elect to have his or her
Accrued Benefit distributable in one (1) of the alternate forms of payment described in subparagraphs (a) through (e) of this Paragraph B.3 as permitted in Article I. The Committee shall instruct 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-4

 
the Trustee to distribute the benefits in such form. If a Waiver Election is in effect when benefits are distributed, but no method of distribution is
otherwise selected by the Participant, then the Committee shall make reasonable efforts to obtain an election of a method of distribution from such Participant. If the Committee is unable to obtain an election for a method of distribution from such
Participant, then the benefits shall be deferred until the later of Normal Retirement Age or age 62, at which time the benefits shall be paid in the form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity if required, or in the form of a cash lump sum in all
other cases. 
 (a) The payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a single sum in cash or in kind. 
 (b) Except as provided in subparagraph 4(a) of this Paragraph B, the payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit as an annuity, in a series
of monthly payments, variable or fixed, with or without a period certain for his or her life or for the joint lives of the Participant and his or her spouse or Designated Beneficiary. 
 (c) The payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a series of installments. 
 (d) Any combination of the methods described above. 
 (e) Effective January 1, 1993, if the distribution constitutes an Eligible Rollover Distribution, the payment of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in a total or partial direct transfer to an Eligible
Retirement Plan; provided that a partial direct transfer shall be equal to at least $500. 
 4. Restriction on Alternate Form of
Benefits. 
 (a) If this Plan does not provided for a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, no distributions shall be made in the form of
a life annuity. In-kind distributions requested by a Participant, if permitted under Article I, shall be made available in a non-discriminatory manner under Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and if permitted by the issuer of the particular asset.
If a Participant elects installments, his or her installment payments shall be payable not less frequently than annually over a period not to exceed any one (1) of the following permissible periods: 
 (i) A period certain not extending beyond the life expectancy of the Participant; or 
 (ii) A period certain not extending beyond the joint and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and a Designated Beneficiary. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-5

 The Trustee may segregate the unpaid balance of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit in one
(1) or more banks, trust companies, savings and loan associations or similar institutions, including the Trust or any of its affiliates, if applicable, for investment in savings accounts, certificates of deposit, government bonds, bankers’
acceptances or similar securities. Unless violative of Section 401(a)(9) of the Code, net earnings on the unpaid vested Accrued Benefit shall be distributed with the last payment. 
 (b) Any deferred distribution from an annuity contract in a form other than a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall require a Waiver Election. The
annuity contract shall provide for the notice provisions of REACT and shall comply with the requirements of this Plan, including the Participant’s rights to optional forms of benefits and the distribution requirement of Section 401(a)(9)
of the Code and the proposed regulations thereunder. Any annuity contract distributed hereunder must be non-transferable. 
 5.
Distribution Consent Requirements. Subject to the last paragraph of this Paragraph B.5, for distributions made prior to March 22, 1999, if the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit ever exceeded $5,000 ($3,500 for Plan Years
beginning before August 6, 1997) at the time a Participant could have received a distribution from the Plan or any subsequent time, the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse or the survivor of the two must consent to any distribution of
such vested Accrued Benefit if the form of benefit is payable in other than a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. No consent is required before the Annuity Starting Date if the vested Accrued Benefit is not more than $5,000. If this Plan is not
subject to Section 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code only the Participant’s consent is required. If this Plan is subject to Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code, a distribution may not be made after the Annuity Starting Date unless the
Participant and the Spouse of the Participant or the Surviving Spouse consent in writing to such distribution even if the vested Accrued Benefit is less than or equal to $5,000. 
 Subject to the last paragraph of this Paragraph B.5, for distribution made on or after March 22, 1999, written consent of the Participant is not
required if the vested Accrued Benefit does not exceed $5,000 at the date of distribution. However, if a Participant has begun to receive distributions pursuant to an optional form of benefit that provides for a schedule of periodic distribution,
consent will be required even if the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit is less than $5,000. If this Plan is subject to Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code, a distribution may not be made after the Annuity Starting Date unless the
Participant and the Spouse of the Participant or the Surviving Spouse consent in writing to such distribution even if the vested Accrued Benefit is less than or equal to $5,000. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-6

 Effective January 1, 1993, if the Participant separates from service with a vested Accrued Benefit
of at least $200 but not more than $5,000, such Participant shall be entitled to elect a direct transfer or partial direct transfer of his or her Accrued Benefit as described in Paragraph B.3 of this Article VII. If the Participant fails to make
such election, his or her vested Accrued Benefit shall be paid to him or her in a single sum payment subject to mandatory federal income tax withholding. Such payment shall occur 30 days after the receipt of the notice described in Paragraph B.2 of
this Article VII but before the 90 day period described in such Paragraph B.2 has expired. 
 If the Participant’s vested Accrued
Benefit is less than $200, it shall be paid to him or her in a single sum payment as soon as administratively feasible after the date elected in Article I. 
 If and to the extent elected in Article I, the involuntary cash-out limit of $5,000 described above shall be $3,500. 
 6. Special Rules. The Committee shall notify the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse of the right to defer benefits to the later of age 62 or the Normal Retirement Age under the Plan and the right to
optional forms of benefit as described in Paragraph B.3 of this Article VII. The notice to defer benefits and the explanation of the optional forms of benefits shall comply with Paragraph B.2 of this Article VII. If the benefit is payable commencing
before the later of age 62 or the Normal Retirement Age, in a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, or if this Plan does not provide for the survivor annuity requirements of REACT, only the Participant’s consent is required. If this Plan is
terminated and an annuity that may be purchased from a commercial provider is not offered as an optional form of distribution, the Participant’s Accrued Benefit payable upon termination may be distributed to the Participant without his or her
consent. The preceding sentence shall not apply if the Employer maintains another defined contribution plan within the Controlled Group other than an employee stock ownership plan as defined in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code to which benefits
are transferred from the terminated Plan. However, the transfer need not require Participant consent. All transfers shall comply with the rules of Section 411(d)(6) of the Code. The consent requirements of this Paragraph B.6 do not apply to the
extent that a distribution is required to satisfy the requirements of Sections 401(a)(9) and 415 of the Code. 
 7. Accumulated Deductible
Employee Contributions. Before the first day of the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1989, the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit shall not include accumulated deductible employee contributions within the meaning of
Section 72(o)(5)(B) of the Code. These employee contributions, if any, shall be maintained in a separate account. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-7

 8. Incidental Benefit Rule. The Committee shall ensure that all distributions required under this
Article VII shall be made and determined in accordance with Section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the proposed regulations issued thereunder, including the minimum distribution and incidental benefit requirements of Section 401(a)(9)(G) of the
Code and Section 1.401(a)(9)-2 of the Proposed Treasury Regulations which are incorporated herein by this reference. 
 9. Commencement of Benefits. Distribution to any Participant of his or her vested Accrued
Benefit shall commence not later than the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he or she attains age 70 1/2. However, with respect to a non-5%-Owner who attained age 70 1/2
prior to January 1, 1988, his or her commencement date shall be the later of the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he or she attains age 70 1/2 or the calendar year in which he or she retires. The term “5%-Owner” shall be further modified by Q&A B-2 of Section 1.401(a)(9)-1 of the Proposed Treasury
Regulations. 
 Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, if
elected in Article I, the required beginning date for minimum required distributions for any Participant (other than a 5%-Owner) is the April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which such Participant attains age
70 1/2 or the calendar year in which such Participant retires. 
 If elected in Article I, the required beginning date for minimum required distributions is the
April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2, except
that benefit distributions to a Participant (other than a 5%-Owner) with respect to benefits accrued after the later of the adoption or effective date of an amendment to the Plan must commence by the later of the April 1 of the calendar year
following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2 or retires. 
 If elected in Article I, any Participant (other than a 5%-Owner) who attained age 70 1/2 prior to January 1, 1997 and who is still employed by the Employer, may elect, in accordance with the
administrative procedures established by the Committee, to stop receiving minimum required distributions until April 1 of the calendar year following retirement. If provided in Article I, there shall be a new Annuity Starting Date upon
recommencement. Any such election shall not affect a new Participant’s right to elect an in-service distribution pursuant to Article I of the Plan. The election to stop receiving minimum required distributions shall also apply to any
Participant who is currently receiving minimum required distributions and has not been given the right to elect to stop such distributions. 
 If provided in Article I, any Participant (other than a 5%-Owner) who attains age 70 1/2 after 1995 and is still employed by the Employer may elect, in 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-8

 
accordance with the administrative procedures established by the Committee, to defer receiving minimum required distributions until the calendar year
following retirement. Such election must be made by the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attained age 70 1/2 (i.e., by April 1, 1997 if the Participant attained age 70 1/2 in 1996) unless such Participant has not been given the right to elect to defer such distributions. If a Participant fails to make such election, such Participant will begin receiving a minimum required distribution by the
April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2 (i.e.,
by April 1, 1997 if the Participant attained age 70 1/2 in 1996). 
 If elected in Article I, the preretirement age 70 1/2 distribution option is only eliminated with respect to Participants who attain age 70 1/2 in or after a calendar year that begins after the later of December 31, 1998, or the adoption date of this amendment. This provision shall not affect the Participant’s
right to receive an in-service distribution pursuant to Article I of the Plan. 
 Any amendment made to an existing plan to eliminate distributions after age 70 1/2 shall not apply if the amendment is not adopted by the last day of the remedial amendment period that applies to such plan due to changes made by the Small Business Job Protection Act of 1996. 
 If this document establishes a new plan and if elected in Article I, any Participant (other than
a 5%-Owner) who is still employed by the Employer and who has attained age 70 1/2 will not be entitled to receive
distributions until the April 1 of the calendar year following retirement. This provision shall not affect the Participant’s right to elect an in-service distribution pursuant to Article I of the Plan. 
 Notwithstanding the above, once minimum required distributions have commenced to a 5%-Owner under this Paragraph B.9, such distributions shall continue.

 The minimum amount to be distributed with respect to the calendar year in which
such Participant attains age 70 1/2 and the amount distributed by December 31 of each calendar year
thereafter must be at least an amount equal to the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Accrued Benefit determined as of the Valuation Date immediately preceding the distribution calendar year by his or her life expectancy or the
joint and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and his or her Designated Beneficiary determined for the distribution calendar year. The life expectancy and the joint and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and his or her Designated
Beneficiary shall be computed by reference to the expected return multiple Tables V and VI contained in Section 1.72-9 of the Income Tax Regulations. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-9

 For purposes of this computation, a Participant’s life expectancy and that of his or her Spouse
shall be recalculated no more frequently than annually unless the Participant or the Surviving Spouse elects not to recalculate. Such election shall be irrevocable as to the Participant or Surviving Spouse for subsequent years. The life expectancy
of a non-spouse Designated Beneficiary may not be recalculated. 
 10. Distribution on Total Disability. Notwithstanding any delay in
the timing of distributions pursuant to Article I, if a Participant terminates employment as a result of Total Disability, he or she shall be eligible for the immediate commencement of his or her vested Accrued Benefit as soon as administratively
feasible after such termination; provided that the Participant shall make a written application for and submit to the Committee sufficient evidence to establish his or her Total Disability. The Committee, in its sole discretion, may demand further
examination by an independent physician acceptable to it to determine the Participant’s Total Disability before approving or denying any such claim. If permitted in Article I, a Participant may receive an in-service distribution of his or her
vested Accrued Benefit on account of Total Disability. 
 C. Distribution at Death. If this Plan provides for an annuity option as
selected in Article I, and if a Participant ceases participation under the Plan by reason of his or her death prior to the Annuity Starting Date, unless there has been a valid Waiver Election during the applicable Election Period, a Qualified
Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall be paid to the Surviving Spouse commencing on the later of the Normal Retirement Age or on the date that a Participant would have attained age 62 unless an alternate form of benefit is selected. The Surviving
Spouse may elect to have such annuity distributed within a reasonable time after the Participant’s death, subject to an adjustment on account of an earlier distribution, if any. 
 1. Notice Requirements and Alternate Forms of Death Benefits. 
 (a) The Committee shall provide each Participant a written explanation of the Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity in such terms and in such manner as would be comparable to the explanations provided for meeting
the notice requirements of Paragraph B.2 of this Article VII applicable to a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. Except for separation from service prior to age 35, the applicable period for a written explanation to a Participant is whichever of
the following periods ends last: (i) the period beginning with the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attained age 32 and ending with the close of the Plan Year preceding the Plan Year in which the Participant attained age 35;
(ii) a reasonable period ending after an Employee becomes a Participant; (iii) a reasonable period ending after the Plan no longer fully subsidizes the benefit; or (iv) a reasonable period ending after Section 401(a)(11) of the
Code first applies to the Participant. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-10

 For purposes of applying clauses (ii), (iii) and (iv) of the preceding paragraph, a reasonable
period ending after the last of these events have occurred means the end of the two-year period beginning one (1) year prior to the date the applicable event occurs, and ending one (1) year after that date. 
 If a Participant separates from service before the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35, notice shall be provided within the two-year
period beginning one (1) year prior to separation and ending one (1) year after separation. If the Participant thereafter returns to employment with the Employer, the applicable period for such Participant shall be redetermined as
described in clauses (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this Paragraph C.1(a). 
 (b) During any time that a Waiver Election is in
force, the Participant may elect to have his or her death benefit distributed in any one of the ways permitted by Paragraph B.3 of this Article VII. 
 If, at the death of a Participant, his or her death benefit is payable in the form of a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity, the Participant’s Surviving Spouse shall be entitled to select by written election
an alternate form of benefit payment in any of the ways permitted by such Paragraph B.3. 
 2. Timing of Distributions. Upon the death
of a Participant, the following distribution provisions shall apply: 
 (a) If the Participant dies after distribution of his or her vested
Accrued Benefit has commenced, the remaining portion of such Accrued Benefit shall continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used prior to the Participant’s death. 
 (b) If the Participant dies before distribution of his or her vested Accrued Benefit has commenced, the Participant’s entire death benefit shall be
distributed no later than December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of his or her death, unless the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary receives distributions in accordance with the following subparagraphs
(i) or (ii): 
 (i) If the Participant’s Accrued Benefit is payable to a Designated Beneficiary, distributions may be made in
substantially equal installments, if installments are a permitted optional form of benefit as selected in Article I, over the life or life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary (or over a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of such
Designated Beneficiary) commencing no later than December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year of the Participant’s death. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-11

 (ii) If the Designated Beneficiary is the
Participant’s Surviving Spouse, at the Spouse’s election, the date distributions are required to commence need not be earlier than December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70 1/2 had he or she lived. If the Surviving Spouse dies before payments to him or her commence, the Spouse shall be
deemed to be, and shall be treated as, the Participant. 
 (iii) Minimum payments made to a Surviving Spouse shall be calculated by
reference to the expected return multiple Table V contained in Section 1.72-9 of the Treasury Regulations. The life expectancy of the Surviving Spouse shall be recalculated annually unless otherwise elected by the Surviving Spouse prior to the
first distribution date. 
 (iv) For purposes of subparagraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) of this Paragraph C.2(b), any amount paid to a
child of the Participant shall be treated as if it had been paid to the Surviving Spouse if the amount becomes payable to the Surviving Spouse when the child attains the age of majority under applicable state law. 
 3. REACT Death Benefit. If the Plan is subject to REACT Surviving Spouse protection, the amount of death benefits to be paid to the
Participant’s Surviving Spouse shall be a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity determined in accordance with Article I and this Article VII. Any remaining Accrued Benefit shall be paid in accordance with the Participant’s Beneficiary
designation. If this Plan does not provide for an annuity option, the special rule as provided in Paragraph E of this Article VII shall apply. 
 4. Death Benefits. The death benefit payable under this Plan shall be equal to the face amount of any life insurance policies, if any (excluding key man insurance) on such Participant’s life in effect on his or her date of
death, plus such Participant’s Accrued Benefit. 
 5. Lack of Designation. If such deceased Participant had filed with the
Committee a document naming a Designated Beneficiary, but failed to designate the form in which benefit payments are to be made, then the Committee shall direct the Trustee to distribute to such Designated Beneficiary the unpaid amount of the
Participant’s Accrued Benefit as determined above, in such one (1) or more ways as permissible under Paragraph B.3 of this Article VII. If such deceased Participant failed to name a Designated Beneficiary, or if no Designated Beneficiary
survives him or her, then the unpaid amount of the Participant’s Accrued Benefit shall be paid to the Designated Beneficiary pursuant to the priorities set forth in Article IX of the Plan. 
 6. Proof of Death. Upon the death of a Participant, the Committee may, but need not, require the personal representative of the Participant’s
estate and/or the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-12

 
Designated Beneficiary to furnish proof of death and such tax release forms and any other forms, papers or documents as are deemed appropriate by the
Committee prior to making any payment of death benefits. 
 7. Proof of Surviving Spouse. The Committee shall withhold and shall not
authorize the distribution of death benefits until such time as the Committee can determine the existence and/or identity of a Surviving Spouse or any other non-spouse Beneficiary. If the Committee cannot determine to its reasonable satisfaction the
identity of the person or persons to whom such death benefits should be distributed within a reasonable time after the date of death of the Participant, then the Committee shall not authorize the distribution of such death benefits but shall hold
such death benefits in trust until the identity of such Surviving Spouse or other Beneficiary is finally determined. If necessary, the Committee shall file a complaint for interpleader and declaratory relief requesting that the court determine the
identity of any persons who are entitled to payment of such benefits. 
 D. Transitional Rules. The Qualified Joint and Survivor
Annuity and Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity provisions of this Article VII, to the extent that they are applicable under this Plan, shall apply only to Participants who complete an Hour of Service on or after August 23, 1984.

 1. Service On or After January 1, 1976. Any Inactive Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984, shall be given
the opportunity to make a Waiver Election for a Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity if such Inactive Participant (i) completed at least one (1) Hour of Service with the Employer under this Plan (or a Predecessor Plan) in a Plan Year
beginning on or after January 1, 1976; and (ii) had completed at least 10 Years of Vested Service when he or she terminated employment. 
 2. Service On or After September 2, 1974 and Before January 1, 1976. Any Inactive Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984, who completed at least one (1) Hour of Service with the Employer under this
Plan (or a Predecessor Plan) on or after September 2, 1974, but who did not complete an Hour of Service in a Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1976, shall be given the opportunity to have his or her benefits paid in accordance
with the distributive provisions and the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity provisions of this Plan in effect before August 23, 1984, as required by Section 303(e) of REACT. 
 Any election available to an Inactive Participant under this Paragraph D.2 may be made during the period commencing on August 23, 1984, and ending
on such former Participant’s Annuity Starting Date. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-13

 E. Non-Annuity Rules. 
 1. No Annuities. If this Plan does not provide for an annuity option as selected in Article I, then the Participant shall not be entitled to the
payment of his or her vested Accrued Benefit in the form of annuity. Furthermore, the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity provisions of Paragraphs B and C of this Article VII shall not be applicable to
this Plan, but all of the remaining provisions of such Paragraphs B and C relating to distribution forms and time of commencement of distributions shall be applicable to the Participant and his or her Surviving Spouse and/or Designated Beneficiary.
On the death of the Participant, all of his or her death benefit shall be paid to his or her Surviving Spouse within a reasonable time. The Surviving Spouse may elect to receive the deceased Participant’s benefits under the Plan within 90 days
after the date of death. If there is no Surviving Spouse or if the Surviving Spouse consents in writing in a manner prescribed under Paragraph A.7 of this Article VII, then the Participant’s death benefit shall be paid to the Designated
Beneficiary. 
 2. Transferred Benefits. Irrespective of any lack of selection of the annuity option in Article I, the Qualified Joint
and Survivor Annuity and Qualified Preretirement Survivor Annuity provisions of Paragraphs B and C of this Article VII shall apply to Transferred Benefits which are neither rollover benefits nor voluntary transfers under Q&A 3 of
Section 1.411(d)-4 of the Treasury Regulations. 
 F. Time of Distribution. Unless Article I allows Participants to defer
commencement of benefits, distribution to a Participant shall occur no later than 60 days after the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant reaches Normal Retirement Age or terminates employment, whichever is later. However, the failure of a
Participant and his or her Spouse, where applicable, to consent to a distribution, shall be deemed to be an election to defer the commencement of a payment of any benefits to the later of age 62 or the Normal Retirement Age. Notwithstanding anything
herein to the contrary, any deferral of benefit shall not violate Sections 401(a)(9) and 415 of the Code including the failure to consent to a distribution by the Participant and the Spouse where applicable. 
 G. Pre-TEFRA Designations. Notwithstanding Paragraphs B and C of this Article VII, each Participant or his or her Designated Beneficiary who made
a timely designation pursuant to Section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA shall have had the right and power to elect by written designation delivered to the Committee, the time for commencement of and the form of distribution of his or her Accrued Benefits;
provided, however, that any such designation must have been consistent with the provisions of ERISA, the Code and Notice 83-23 in effect at the time the designation was made and shall comply with the spousal consent requirements of REACT; provided,
further, however, that such Participant or his or her Designated Beneficiary may have selected any form of distribution available under the terms of the Plan as in effect at the time of execution of such designation and 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-14

 
the form selected by each Participant is hereby incorporated by reference. The following form of distribution is also available pursuant to such designation,
in addition to those forms of distribution set forth above by reference and elsewhere in the Plan: 
 Payment in a series of cash
installments, not less frequently than annually, over a period of time equal to twice the future life expectancy of the Participant determined as of the date payments of benefits commence, or if the Participant is married at such date, over the
greater of twice the life expectancy of the Participant or his or her Spouse. Expected return multiple Tables V and VI of Section 1.72-9 of the Treasury Regulations shall determine the number of years of future life expectancy. 
 If a designation is revoked subsequent to the date distributions are required to commence, the Trust must distribute by the end of the calendar year
following the calendar year in which the revocation occurs the total amount not yet distributed which would have been required to have been distributed to satisfy Section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the proposed regulations thereunder, but for
the Section 242(b)(2) election. For calendar years beginning after December 31, 1988, such distributions must meet the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirements in Section 1.401(a)(9)-2 of the Proposed Regulations. Any
changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of another Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will not be considered to be a revocation
of the designation, so long as such substitution or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are to be made under the designation, directly or indirectly (such as altering the relevant measuring life). If an amount is transferred
or rolled over from one plan to another, the rules in Q&A J-2 and Q&A J-3 of Section 1.401(a)(9)-1 of the Proposed Regulations shall apply. 
 H. Loans to Participants. If allowed under Article I, the Committee may, in its sole discretion and upon written application of a Participant or his or her Beneficiaries on a form provided by the Committee,
direct the Trustee to make a loan or loans to such Participant in a total amount not to exceed the lesser of (i) $50,000 reduced by any excess of the highest outstanding balance of loans made to the Participant from the Plan during the one
(1) year period ending on the day before the date the most recent loan is given, over the outstanding balance of any loan from the Plan made to the Participant on the date which the loan was made; or (ii) 50% of the single sum of the
vested Accrued Benefit of such Participant; provided that the policy with respect to making any such loan or loans shall be uniformly and non-discriminatorily applied and shall not be made available to Highly Compensated Employees, officers or
shareholders in an amount greater than the amount made available to other Employees. For purposes of the preceding sentence, loans shall be aggregated pursuant to Section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code. In no event shall the
Committee be required to make any such loans. In determining such limitation, the Committee shall take into account the balance of such loan or loans and the balance of all outstanding loans to the Participant under this Plan or any other qualified
plan of the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-15

 
Employer. The Committee shall give due consideration to the type of security given for the loan and the creditworthiness of the Participant/borrower in
determining whether to approve or disapprove a loan. Unless loans are designated as a directed investment of the Participant’s Account pursuant to Article I, any loan or loans made to a Participant shall be treated as an investment of the
Trust. Any loans shall be (i) for a specific term, which shall not exceed five (5) years unless the Participant certifies in writing to the Committee that the proceeds of the loan will be applied to acquire the Participant’s principal
residence; (ii) adequately secured in the event of a default by the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit and other collateral if the Committee reasonably determines that additional collateral is necessary; and (iii) evidenced by the
Participant’s promissory note bearing interest at the rate equal to the prevailing interest rate charged by persons in the business of lending money for loans made under similar circumstances. 
 For Participant loans granted or renewed on or after the last day of the first Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1989, the Committee shall
establish a written program which contains the following requirements: 
 1. The identity of the person(s) authorized to administer the loan
program. 
 2. A procedure for applying for a loan. 
 3. The basis on which loans will be approved or denied. 
 4. Limitations, if any, on the types and amount of
the loan offered. 
 5. The procedures for determining a reasonable rate of interest. 
 6. The type of collateral which may secure a Participant’s loan. 
 7. The events constituting default and causing acceleration and the steps that will be taken to preserve plan assets in the event of any such events. 
 In addition to any acceleration provisions contained in the promissory note, a Participant’s loan shall immediately become due and payable if such
Participant is entitled to and elects to receive a distribution from the Plan. In this case, the Employer shall immediately request payment of the outstanding principal balance and accrued but unpaid interest on the loan. If the Participant does not
repay such amount within a reasonable time after such request, the Employer shall have the right to offset and reduce the Participant’s vested Account balance which was used for security for such loan by such amount. If the Participant’s
vested Account balance is less than the amount due, the Employer shall take appropriate steps to collect the balance due directly from the Participant. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-16

 Upon default of a loan, the Participant’s Accrued Benefit shall be reduced by the outstanding
principal balance of the loan plus accrued but unpaid interest. However, if the Participant’s Account is subject to the withdrawal restrictions of Section 401(k) of the Code or if this Plan is subject to Section 417 of the Code, the
Participant’s Account balance shall not be reduced until a distributable event occurs under the terms of the Plan. During any time that a loan is in default under the terms of the promissory note and the borrowing Participant’s vested
Accrued Benefit is not distributable, such loan shall be treated as a directed investment of such Participant’s Account, regardless of whether directed investments are permitted in Article I. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing, loans to an Owner-Employee (or a Shareholder-Employee as defined in former Section 1379(d) of the Code) shall not be
permitted under the Plan without an exemption from the prohibited transaction requirements of the Code. 
 If a Participant making a loan
pursuant to this Paragraph HH is married, the Committee shall require that such Participant obtain his or her Spouse’s consent to the making of the loan and the possible reduction in such Participant’s Accrued Benefit. Such consent shall
be obtained within the 90-day period prior to the making of the loan and shall be in writing and shall acknowledge the effect of the loan and shall be witnessed by a Plan representative or notary public. However, if this Plan does not provide for
annuities, spousal consent shall not be required. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Distributions to Incompetent Persons. The Committee may direct the Trustee to distribute the benefits of any Participant pursuant to the
instructions of any person named by such Participant in a durable power of attorney which, on its face, appears to be valid and enforceable, or the legal guardian or conservator of such Participant, or the custodian of such Participant’s assets
under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act (or the comparable law of any state in which such Participant resides). 
 K. Nonliability. Any
payment to a Participant or Designated Beneficiary, or to the legal representative of a Participant or Designated Beneficiary, in accordance with the provisions of this Plan, shall to the extent thereof be in full satisfaction of all claims under
this Plan against the Trustee, the Committee and the Employer, any of whom may require such Participant, legal representative or Designated Beneficiary, as a condition precedent to such payment, to execute a receipt and release therefor in such form
as shall be determined by the Trustee, the Committee, or the Employer, as the case may be. The Employer does not guarantee the Trust, the Participants, former Participants or their Designated Beneficiaries against loss of or depreciation in value of
any right or benefit that any of them may acquire under the terms of this Plan. All of the benefits payable under this Plan shall be paid or provided solely from the Trust, and the Employer does not assume any liability or responsibility for payment
of such benefits. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-17

 L. Benefit Claims Procedure. 
 1. Applications. All applications for benefits under the Plan shall be submitted to the Committee at the Employer’s principal place of
business. Applications for benefits must be in writing on forms acceptable by the Committee and must be signed by the Participant and his or her Spouse, or in the case of a death benefit, by the Designated Beneficiary or legal representative of the
deceased Participant. The Committee reserves the right to require the Participant to furnish proof of his or her marital status, age, and the age of his or her Spouse, if any, prior to processing any application. Each application shall be acted upon
and approved or disapproved by the Committee within 60 days following its receipt by the responsible officer of the Employer. If any application for benefits is denied, in whole or in part, the Committee shall notify the applicant in writing of such
denial and of his or her right to a review by the Committee and shall set forth, in a manner calculated to be understood by the applicant, the specific reasons for such denial, the specific references to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial
is based, a description of any additional material or information necessary for the applicant to perfect his or her application, an explanation of why such material or information is necessary, and an explanation of the Plan’s review procedure.

 2. Review of Denials. Any person whose application for benefits is denied in whole or in part may appeal to the Committee for a
review of the decision by submitting a written statement to the Committee within 90 days after receiving written notice from the Committee of the denial of his or her claim (i) requesting a review by the Committee of his or her application for
benefits; (ii) setting forth all of the grounds upon which his or her request for review is based and any facts in support of such request; and (iii) setting forth any issues or comments which the applicant deems pertinent to his or her
application. The Committee shall meet as required to review appeals of denials of applications for benefits submitted to it. The Committee shall act upon each appeal within 60 days after receipt of the applicant’s request for review by the
Committee. The Committee shall make a full and fair review of each such application and any written material submitted by the applicant or the Employer in connection with such review and may require the Employer or the applicant to submit such
additional facts, documents, or other evidence as the Committee, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or advisable in making such a review. On the basis of its review, the Committee shall make an independent determination of the applicant’s
eligibility for benefits under the Plan. The decision of the Committee on any application for benefits shall be final and conclusive upon all persons if supported by substantial evidence in the records. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-18

 M. Income Tax Withholding. Distributions made under the Plan to any Participant or his or her
Designated Beneficiary shall be subject to the income tax withholding rules set forth in Section 3405 of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder. 
 N. Qualified Domestic Relations Orders. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Committee shall direct the Trustee to make
distribution to an alternate payee in accordance with a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, and such distribution may be made, notwithstanding the age or continued employment of the Participant who is a party to such Order, at any time as specified
in the Order, provided the Order is filed with the court, served on the Plan, approved by the Committee and the alternate payee executes release forms, withholding forms and any other documents, forms or papers that the Committee deems necessary and
desirable. 
 O. Overpayment of Vested Interest. If a Participant or Beneficiary is erroneously paid benefits greater than the
Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit, the Committee may, in its sole discretion exercised in the best interests of Participants and Beneficiaries, demand from the Participant or Beneficiary repayment of such overpayment. If the Participant or
Beneficiary refuses to make repayment, the Committee may take legal action to recover the amount of the overpayment, plus interest, and costs of collection including reasonable attorneys’ fees. If the Participant returns to employment and the
overpayment has not been repaid to the Plan, the Committee may offset the overpayment against future Plan benefits. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VII	  	 VII-19

 VIII. TOP-HEAVY LIMITATIONS 
 If in any Plan Year the Plan is a Top-heavy Plan as defined in Paragraph A below, the limitations and requirements set forth in this Article VIII shall
apply to the Plan, unless this is a Simple 401(k) Plan within the meaning of Section 401(k)(11) of the Code. 
 A. Definitions.

 1. “Determination Date” means with respect to any Plan Year the last day of the preceding Plan Year or, in the case of the
first Plan Year, the last day of such Plan Year, provided that the Employer did not previously establish another qualified plan that is part of a Required Aggregation Group. 
 2. “Key Employee” means any Participant who at any time during the Plan Year containing the Determination Date or any of the four
(4) preceding Plan Years is: 
 (a) An officer of the Employer having Section 415 Compensation greater than 50% of the Defined
Benefit Dollar Limitation; provided, however, that no more than 50 Employees or, if lesser, the greater of three (3) or 10% of the Employees shall be treated as officers; provided further that if the total number of officers exceeds this
limitation, only the highest compensated officers shall be included; 
 (b) One
(1) of the 10 Employees having Section 415 Compensation from the Employer of more than the Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation and owning (or considered as owning within the meaning of Section 318 of the Code) both more than  1/2% interest and the largest interests in the Employer. For such purposes, if two (2) Employees have the same
interest in the Employer, the Employee having the greater Section 415 Compensation from the Employer shall be treated as having a larger interest; 
 (c) A 5%-Owner of the Employer; 
 (d) A 1%-Owner of the Employer whose Section 415 Compensation
exceeds $150,000; or 
 (e) A Beneficiary of a Key Employee or a former Key Employee. 
 For purposes of this Paragraph A.2, Section 415 Compensation shall include amounts contributed by the Employer pursuant to a salary reduction
agreement which are excludable from the Employee’s gross income under Section 125, 402(e)(3), 402(h), 403(b), 408(p)(2)(A)(i) or 457 of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-1

 An Employee shall be deemed a “1%-Owner” if he or she (i) owns more than one percent
(1%) of the outstanding stock or owns stock possessing more than one percent (1%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock, if the Employer is a corporation; or (ii) owns more than one percent (1%) of the
capital or profit interests in the Employer if the Employer is not a corporation. In making the determination of a 1%-Owner or a 5%-Owner, Section 416(i)(1)(B)(iii) of the Code modifies Section 318(a)(2) of the Code, the corporate
attribution rule. The business aggregation rules of Section 414 of the Code shall not be applied to determine ownership in the Employer. 
 3. “Non-Key Employee” means any Employee who is not a Key Employee. 
 4. “Top-heavy Plan” means,
with respect to any Plan Year, (i) any defined benefit pension plan maintained by the Employer if, as of the Determination Date, the present value of cumulative Accrued Benefits under the plan for Key Employees exceeds 60% of the present value
of cumulative Accrued Benefits under the Plan for all Employees; and (ii) any defined contribution plan, other than a Simple 401(k) Plan, maintained by the Employer if, as of the Determination Date, the aggregate of the Accounts of Key
Employees under the Plan exceeds 60% of the aggregate of the Accounts of all Employees under the Plan. This rule is referred to herein as the “60% Test.” 
 5. “Top-heavy Group” means any Aggregation Group if the sum of the present value of cumulative accrued benefits for Key Employees under all defined benefit pension plans included in the Aggregation
Group, and the sum of the accounts of Key Employees under all defined contribution plans included in the Aggregation Group, exceed 60% of a similar sum determined for all Employees. An “Aggregation Group” means either a Required
Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group. 
 6. “Required Aggregation Group” means each qualified plan of the
Employer in which a Key Employee is a participant, and each other qualified plan of the Employer which enables the qualified plan or plans containing a Key Employee to meet the anti-discrimination requirements of Section 401(a)(4) or 410 of the
Code. A Required Aggregation Group includes any qualified plan of the Employer that has terminated within the last (5) years ending on the Determination Date. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-2

 B. Aggregation Groups. 
 1. Required Aggregation Group. Each qualified plan of the Employer required to be included in a Required Aggregation Group shall be treated as a
Top-heavy Plan if the Required Aggregation Group is a Top-heavy Group. 
 2. Permissive Aggregation Group. For purposes of determining
the existence of a Top-heavy Group, the Employer may elect to include in the Required Aggregation Group any other qualified plan of the Employer not otherwise required to be included, if such Group after the election would continue to meet the
anti-discrimination requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code; provided, however, that any such qualified plan will not be otherwise deemed a Top-heavy Plan by reason of such election. 
 If the Permissive Aggregation Group is a Top-heavy Group, each qualified plan of the Employer that is a part of a Required Aggregation Group will be
considered a Top-heavy Plan. If the Permissive Aggregation Group is not a Top-heavy Group, no qualified plan in the Permissive Aggregation Group will be considered a Top-heavy Plan. 
 3. Plans Aggregated. Only those qualified plans of the Employer in which the Determination Dates fall within the calendar year shall be aggregated
to determine whether the qualified plans (or the Aggregation Group) are Top-heavy Plans (or a Top-heavy Group). 
 C. 60% Test –
Special Rules. For purposes of the 60% Test, the following special rules of this Paragraph C shall apply. 
 1. Participant
Contributions. Benefits derived from both Participant contributions (whether voluntary or mandatory, but not deductible contributions) and Employer contributions shall be taken into account for the 60% Test. 
 2. Distributions. In determining the present value of cumulative Accrued Benefits of any Participant or the Account of any Participant under the
Plan (or plans which form the Aggregation Group), such present value or Account shall be increased by the aggregate of distributions made to such Participant from the Plan (or plans forming the Aggregation Group) during the five (5) year period
ending on the Determination Date. For this purpose, the term “Participant” shall include an Employee who is no longer employed by the Employer. The foregoing shall also apply to distributions under a terminated qualified plan of the
Employer which, if it had not been terminated, would have been required to be included in an Aggregation Group. 
 3. Rollover
Contributions. Except as otherwise provided in the Treasury Regulations, any rollover contribution or similar transfer made by an Employee to the Plan after December 31, 1983 shall not be taken into account; provided, however, that 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-3

 
this transfer rule shall not apply to mergers or consolidations of several plans, the division of one (1) plan, or rollovers between plans of the
Employer or related employers. 
 4. Change of Status. The cumulative Accrued Benefit or Account of a Participant who was formerly a
Key Employee, but who ceases to be a Key Employee for a Plan Year, shall not be taken into account for purposes of the 60% Test for the Plan Year in which he or she is not a Key Employee. 
 5. Non-Performance of Service. The Accounts and Accrued Benefits of a Participant who has not performed services for the Employer maintaining the
Plan during the five (5) year period ending on the Determination Date shall be disregarded. 
 6. Determination of Present Value.
The present value of cumulative accrued benefits under any aggregated defined benefit pension plan maintained by the Employer shall be determined by applying the actuarial equivalents set forth in such defined benefit pension plan. 
 7. Determination of Accrued Benefit. Solely for the purpose of determining if the Plan, or any other plan included in a Required Aggregation Group
of which this Plan is a part, is top-heavy (within the meaning of Section 416(g) of the Code) the accrued benefit of an Employee other than a Key Employee (within the meaning of Section 416(i)(1) of the Code) shall be determined under
(i) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all plans maintained by the Controlled Group; or (ii) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted
under the fractional accrual rate of Section 411(b)(1)(C) of the Code. 
 D. Minimum Vesting Requirements. If the Plan is a
Top-heavy Plan, then the partial vesting provisions of Paragraph A.5 of Article VI are modified to the extent necessary to provide for vesting at a faster rate during the relevant Plan Year under either of the following vesting schedules, as elected
in Paragraph V of Article I: 
 1. 3-Year Cliff Vesting. Each Employee who has completed three (3) Years of Vested Service with
the Employer shall be 100% vested in his or her Accrued Benefit. 
 2. 6-Year Graded Vesting. Each Employee shall have a
non-forfeitable vested interest in his or her Accrued Benefit determined under the following schedule: 
  

					
	 Years of
 Vesting Service
	  	 Vested Percentage
 of the Participant’s
 Accrued Benefit

	less than	 	2	  	    0%
		 	2	  	  20%
		 	3	  	  40%
		 	4	  	  60%
		 	5	  	  80%
		 	6 or more	  	100%

  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-4

 3. Limitations on Right to Amend Vesting Schedule. The limitations of Paragraph K of Article VI
regarding the right to amend the vesting schedule shall apply to any change in the vesting schedule caused by the Plan becoming a Top-heavy Plan, or ceasing to be a Top-heavy Plan. 
 E. Minimum Benefit Requirement. If the Plan is a Top-heavy Plan, then to the extent that the Plan benefits do not meet the minimum benefit
requirements set forth below, each Participant who is not a Key Employee shall be provided with such minimum benefits. Key Employees shall share in the allocation of Top-heavy minimum benefits, if any, as described in this Paragraph E, if elected in
Article I. Such minimum benefits shall be determined without taking into account Employer contributions to or a Participant’s benefits under the Social Security Act. To the extent that the minimum benefit of any Participant is vested in
accordance with Paragraph D of this Article VIII, such minimum Accrued Benefit may not be forfeited or suspended under Section 411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D) of the Code. 
 1. 3% Benefit. Each Participant who is not a Key Employee shall receive an allocation of Employer contributions (and forfeitures, if applicable) of
not less than three percent (3%) or such higher percentage of such Participant’s Section 415 Compensation as elected in Article I; provided, however, that if there is an allocation of Employer contributions (and forfeitures, if
applicable) of less than three percent (3%) of Section 415 Compensation in any Plan Year for all Employees, the allocation of such contributions (and forfeitures, if applicable) need not exceed the highest percentage of Section 415
Compensation at which such contributions (and forfeitures, if applicable) are allocated or required to be allocated under the Plan for any Key Employee. If the top-heavy contribution is less than three percent (3%), then Elective Contributions made
by Key Employees shall be included in determining the Key Employee percentage of contribution. If a Key Employee participates in a defined benefit plan which is included with this Plan in a Top-heavy Group, a three percent (3%) minimum benefit
will be provided to each Non-Key Employee who only participates in this Plan. 
 All defined contribution plans required to be included in
an Aggregation Group shall be treated as one (1) plan; provided, however, that any defined contribution plan required to be included in an Aggregation Group where such plan enables a defined benefit pension plan to meet the anti-discrimination
requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code shall not be taken into account. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-5

 2. Persons Covered. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Plan, each person
who is a Participant (other than an Inactive Participant) on the last day of the Plan Year shall have allocated to his or her Employer Contribution Account the minimum benefits provided under this Paragraph E even if such Participant (i) fails
to complete 1,000 Hours of Service during the Plan Year; (ii) refuses to make mandatory contributions to the Plan, if applicable; or (iii) is excluded from participation under the Plan because his or her Section 415 Compensation is less
than a stated amount. 
 3. Profit Sharing and Retirement Savings Plans. Participant Elective Contributions made pursuant to Paragraph
H.2 of Article I shall be taken into account in determining the minimum benefit requirements of Paragraphs E and G of this Article VIII. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, Elective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions shall be treated as contributions for purposes of determining the minimum contribution or benefits allocated to Key Employees
under Section 416 of the Code but will not be treated as satisfying the minimum contribution or benefit requirements of Section 416 of the Code for Non-Key Employees. However, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions described in
Section 401(m)(4)(C) of the Code and Matching Contributions not used to satisfy the 401(k) and 401(m) discrimination tests may be used to satisfy minimum contribution requirements for Non-Key Employees. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1998, Safe Harbor Matching Contributions may not be used to satisfy the top-heavy minimum contribution
or benefit requirement of Section 416 of the Code. However, Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions may be used to satisfy such top-heavy minimum requirements. 
 F. Annual Section 415 Compensation. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, Section 415 Compensation shall be limited to
the Compensation Limitation. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1983 and before January 1, 1989, for purposes of determining the retirement benefits under a Top-heavy defined benefit pension plan and the allocations of
contributions (and forfeitures, if applicable) under a Top-heavy defined contribution plan, the maximum amount of Section 415 Compensation of any Participant shall not exceed $200,000.00, as such amount may be annually adjusted for cost of
living increases in Plan Years at the same time and in the same manner allowed by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to Regulations to be issued under Section 415(d) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-6

 G. Multiple Plans. If this Plan is the only qualified plan of the Employer in which a Participant
who is a Non-Key Employee participates, the minimum benefits required by Paragraph E.1 of this Article VII shall be provided under this Plan. If such Participant participates in this Plan and a defined benefit plan included in a Top-heavy Group or
in another defined contribution plan of the Employer included in a Top-heavy Group, the top-heavy minimum benefits shall be provided under the Plan designated in Article I. 
 1. Special Section 416 Rules. If such multiple plans, including this Plan, consist of a defined benefit pension plan and a defined
contribution plan, the Rule of 1.0 as set forth in Article V of the Plan (as it may be modified by the Top-heavy Plan transitional rule under Section 416(h)(3) of the Code) shall be in effect only if the following two (2) requirements are
satisfied: 
 (a) The Employer shall designate in Article I whether this Plan or another plan provides for the additional top-heavy minimum
benefits for purposes of Section 416(h) of the Code. If the Employer elects in Article I to provide the additional top-heavy minimum benefits, and the conditions of subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph G apply, Non-Key Employees covered only
by the Employer’s defined contribution plan will receive a four percent (4%) top-heavy minimum benefit. 
 (b) The sum of the
cumulative Accrued Benefits and the aggregate of accounts held for Key Employees under the plans cannot exceed 90% of a similar sum for all Employees. 
 If either of the requirements of subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this Paragraph G.1 is not met, then for purposes of the Rule of 1.0 as set forth in Article V of the Plan, the number “1.25” as applied
to the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction and to the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction shall be replaced by the number “1.0.” 
 2.
Repeal of the Rule of 1.0. For Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1999, Paragraph G.1 of this Article VIII shall no longer apply unless otherwise elected in Article I. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE VIII	  	 VIII-7

 IX. DESIGNATED BENEFICIARIES 
 Each Participant and Inactive Participant may name a Designated Beneficiary to receive his or her death benefits by completing a form acceptable to the
Committee. Participants shall have the right at any time to revoke such designation or to substitute another Designated Beneficiary. If at the death of a Participant or a Designated Beneficiary, the name of a Designated Beneficiary or contingent
Designated Beneficiary is not on file with the Committee, the Participant shall be deemed to have named the following Designated Beneficiary, in order of priority: 
 (i) The Surviving Spouse (as defined in Paragraph A.5 of Article VII, without regard to the one-year marriage requirement); 
 (ii) If the Participant is not survived by a Surviving Spouse, the trustees of the revocable living trust established by the Participant during his or her lifetime; 
 (iii) The Participant’s children, per stirpes; 
 (iv) The Participant’s estate. 
 The Committee’s determination as to which persons, if any, qualify within the
aforementioned categories shall be final and conclusive upon all persons. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE IX	  	 IX-1

 X. CONTRIBUTIONS BY PARTICIPANTS 
 A. Employee After-Tax Contributions. 
 1. Eligibility. If allowed under Article I, all Participants are eligible to make Employee After-Tax Contributions to the Plan by submitting an application on forms acceptable to the Committee. All such applications shall include the
Participant’s acceptance of the relevant terms and conditions of this Plan. If such contributions are to be made by payroll deduction, such application shall state the Participant’s designation of the proportion of his or her
Section 415 Compensation which he or she shall contribute, and his or her consent to the withholding of such contributions by the Employer. Contributions may also be made by the Participant in a single-sum form by direct contribution. A
Participant may continue to make Employee After-Tax Contributions throughout the period he or she is a Participant; provided, however, that a Participant shall have the absolute right to discontinue payroll deduction Employee After-Tax Contributions
as of the end of any month following the month in which he or she gives written notice thereof to the Employer. 
 2. Amount of
Contributions. A Participant may contribute to the Trust such amounts as he or she shall determine as set forth in his or her written election; provided, however, that such amounts shall not exceed the limitations of Paragraph E of Article V. A
Participant may change the amount of his or her Employee After-Tax Contributions withheld by payroll deduction once during each Plan Year, and any other time permitted by the Committee, with respect to future contributions by filing a written
election with the Committee. 
 3. Collection of Contributions. All contributions received by the Employer, whether by withholding or
by direct payment from the Participant, shall be paid over by the Employer to the Trustee. 
 B. Rollover Contributions. If allowed
under Article I, any Employee who is a Participant during any Plan Year, or any Employee who the Committee reasonably anticipates will become a Participant, may make qualified Rollover Contributions to the Plan. If the Committee shall determine,
subsequent to any such contribution, that such contribution did not in fact constitute a qualified Rollover Contribution, the amount of such contribution shall be returned to the Employee as soon thereafter as reasonably practicable. Any such
qualified Rollover Contributions shall be allocated and held on behalf of the Participant in a Rollover Contribution Account. Said Account shall be deemed a part of the Participant’s Accrued Benefit and shall be subject to the distribution
provisions of Article VII of the Plan. 
 C. Separate Administration and Accounts for Participant Contributions. The Employee
After-Tax Contributions and the Rollover Contributions of a Participant shall be 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-1

 
accounted for separately. The Committee shall establish an Employee After-Tax Contribution Account for each Participant’s Employee After-Tax
Contributions and a Rollover Contribution Account for his or her Rollover Contributions. Unless Participant Directed Accounts are allowed under Article I, a Participant’s Employee After-Tax Contribution Account and Rollover Contribution Account
shall be invested in the general Trust Fund. On each Valuation Date, the Committee shall determine the fair market value of such Accounts and (subject to the following sentence) shall allocate income or losses to the respective Accounts in
proportion to the amounts therein as of the Valuation Date. For the purpose of allocating income and losses, the Accounts to which Participants’ contributions are allocated shall be valued by including only a portion of current year
contributions and taking into account Participant withdrawals, which portion shall be determined on a weighted basis by considering the length of time (in complete months) since the making of the contribution (or withdrawal) in relation to the
number of complete months elapsed since the last Valuation Date. 
 D. Vesting. A Participant’s Employee After-Tax Contribution
Account and Rollover Contribution Account shall at all times be fully vested. 
 E. Withdrawal of Contributions. The balance of the
Employee After-Tax Contribution Account as of any Anniversary Date may be withdrawn upon 90 days written notice to the Committee, severance of employment being automatically deemed such notice; provided, however, that such 90 day period may be
extended by the Committee to satisfy liquidity needs of the Trust. Any Participant who withdraws 90% of his or her Employee After-Tax Contribution Account within one (1) Plan Year must withdraw his or her entire Employee After-Tax Contribution
Account and shall be ineligible to make Employee After-Tax Contributions for the period ending on the Anniversary Date following one (1) year from the date of the last such withdrawal. If this Plan is subject to Section 417 of the Code,
the withdrawal of all or any portion of a Participant’s Employee After-Tax Contributions shall be subject to the annuity provisions of Article VII of the Plan. 
 F. Distribution of Rollover Contribution Accounts. When a Participant terminates employment for any reason, his or her Rollover Contribution Accounts shall be distributed to him or her (or in the case of death,
to his or her Designated Beneficiary) in the form designated by the Participant as required pursuant to the provisions of Article VII of the Plan. If elected in Article I, a Participant may receive his or her Rollover Contribution Account prior to
termination of employment. 
 G. Limitations on Section 401(m) Contributions. 
 1. Contribution Percentage Limitation. 
 (a) For Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1997, the amount of Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions made on behalf of the group of Highly Compensated Employees shall not result in an Average Contribution Percentage that
exceeds the greater of the following: 
 (i) The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated
Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-2

 (ii) The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees
for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by two (2); provided that the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible
Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees by more than two (2) percentage points or such lesser amount as the
Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe to prevent the multiple use of this alternative limitation with respect to any Highly Compensated Employee. 
 (b) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the amount of Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions made on behalf of the group consisting of Highly Compensated Employees shall not result in an
Actual Deferral Percentage that exceeds the greater of the following: 
 (i) The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants
who are Highly Compensated Employees for the current Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or the preceding Plan Year, as elected in Article
I, multiplied by 1.25; or 
 (ii) The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the
Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or the preceding Plan Year, as elected in Article I, multiplied by two (2); provided that the Average
Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the current or preceding Plan Year, as
elected in Article I, by more than two (2) percentage points or such lesser amount as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe to prevent the multiple use of this alternative limitation with respect to any Highly Compensated Employee.

  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-3

 For the first Plan Year in which the Plan (other than a successor plan) provides for a Matching
Contribution or After-Tax Employer Contribution, the Average Contribution Percentage of Non-Highly Compensated Employees under the prior year testing method shall be the greater of three percent (3%) or the Average Contribution Percentage of
the Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the first Plan Year. 
 If the Plan provides for the prior year testing method, the Average
Contribution Percentage shall be determined without regard to changes in the group of Non-Highly Compensated Employees who are Eligible Participants during the testing year. 
 2. Matching Contributions. If elected in Article I, Matching Contributions may be made to the Plan. Such Matching Contributions shall be allocated
in accordance with Article I. 
 3. Safe Harbor Matching Contributions and Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions. If Safe
Harbor Matching Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions are made to this Plan, the Average Contribution Percentage shall be deemed satisfied but only with respect to Matching Contributions provided that the following
requirements are met: 
 (a) Each Non-Highly Compensated Employee who is eligible to receive an allocation of Safe Harbor Matching
Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions under the Plan must be an Eligible Participant under the Plan’s cash or deferred arrangement; 
 (b) The Plan provides for a Safe Harbor Matching Contribution formula as described in either Section 401(k)(12)(B)(i) of the Code (the “Basic Matching Formula”) and no other required Matching
Contributions are provided under the Plan or Section 401(m)(11)(B)(ii) of the Code (the “Enhanced Matching Formula”) and with respect to the Enhanced Matching Formula, the Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are only made with
respect to Elective Contributions or Employee After-Tax Contributions that do not exceed six percent (6%) of the Employee’s Compensation and no other required Matching Contributions are provided under this Plan. Alternatively, the Plan
provides for a Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contribution formula that satisfies Section 401(k)(12)(C) of the Code and any required Matching Contributions that do not exceed six percent (6%) of Compensation; 
 (c) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1999, Matching Contributions made at the Employer’s discretion on behalf of any Participant
may not exceed a dollar amount greater than four percent (4%) of such Participant’s Compensation and are only made with respect to Elective Contributions or Employee’s After-Tax Contributions that do not exceed six percent
(6%) of the Participant’s Compensation; and 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-4

 (d) Effective for the Plan quarter beginning after May 1, 2000, if Safe Harbor Matching
Contributions are made on a payroll period method rather than on an annual method, then such Safe Harbor Matching Contributions must be contributed to the Plan by the last day of the following Plan Year quarter; 
 (e) Safe Harbor Matching Contributions must also satisfy the requirements of Paragraph F of Article IV. 
 4. Simple 401(k) Plan. A Simple 401(k) Plan shall not be subject to the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 5. Special Rules. 
 (a) For purposes
of determining the Contribution Percentage limitation, Employee After-Tax Contributions are taken into account for a Plan Year in which such amounts were contributed to the trust or paid to an agent of the Plan and transmitted to the trust within a
reasonable time after the payment to the agent. Excess Contributions that are recharacterized are taken into account as Employee After-Tax Contributions for the Plan Year that includes the period for which such Excess Contributions are includable in
the gross income of the Employee. 
 (b) A Matching Contribution or Safe Harbor Matching Contribution will be taken into account under the
Contribution Percentage limitation for the Plan Year only if such contribution is (i) allocated to the Employee Account under the terms of the Plan as of any date within the Plan Year; (ii) actually paid to the trust no later than the end
of the 12-month period beginning on the date after the close of the Plan Year; and (iii) made on behalf of the Employee on account of such Employee’s Elective Contributions or Employee After-Tax Contributions for the Plan Year. Safe Harbor
Matching Contributions may be allocated only to Non-Highly Compensated Participants. Matching Contributions and Safe Harbor Matching Contributions that do not satisfy all of the preceding requirements of this subparagraph (b) may not be taken
in account for purposes of the Average Contribution Percentage limitation. Instead, the contribution must satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code without regard to the special non-discrimination rule in this paragraph for the Plan Year in which
allocated as if they were the only Employer allocation for that Plan Year. 
 H. Correction of Excess Aggregate Contributions. If the
Committee recharacterizes Excess Contributions as described in Paragraph J.5 of Article IV, the recharacterized amount shall be subject to the Contribution Percentage limitation of Section 401(m) of the Code. Excess Contributions
recharacterized as Employee After-Tax Contributions shall be included in determining the amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions for the Plan Year that ends with or within the Plan Year for which the Contribution Percentage limitation is applied.

  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-5

 The Committee may correct Excess Aggregate Contributions by distributing the Excess Aggregate
Contributions and income allocated thereto to the appropriate Highly Compensated Employee after the close of the Plan Year but not more than 12 months after the close of the Plan Year. The return of Excess Aggregate Contributions to the Highly
Compensated Employee shall be determined using the same method applied to the return of Excess Contributions. 
 The Committee may correct
Excess Aggregate Contributions by the forfeiture of nonvested Matching Contributions (and income allocable thereto). Such forfeitures shall be made only to the extent necessary to avoid failure of the Contribution Percentage limitation. The
forfeiture of Excess Aggregate Contributions to the Highly Compensated Employee shall be determined using the same method applied to the return of Excess Contributions. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Distribution of Income. Any distribution or forfeiture of Excess Aggregate
Contributions must include the income or loss allocated to such contributions. Allocable income or loss includes income or loss both from the Plan Year in which the Contribution Percentage limitation was exceeded and for the gap period between the
end of the Plan Year and the date of distribution. Allocable income or loss for the Plan Year is determined by multiplying the income or loss for the Plan Year allocable to Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions by a fraction, the numerator of
which is the Excess Aggregate Contributions made on behalf of an Employee for the Plan Year and the denominator of which is the total Account balance attributed to Qualifying Section 401(m) Contributions as of the end of the Plan Year minus the
income or plus the loss allocable to such account balance for the Plan Year. The Committee may determine the allocable income or loss for the gap period by using the fractional method, as prescribed in the preceding sentence, for the period between
the end of the Plan Year and the last day of the month preceding the distribution date that is allocable to Qualifying 401(m) Contributions. Alternatively the Committee may determine income or loss for the gap period under a safe-harbor method,
under which income on Excess Aggregate Contributions for the gap period is equal to 10% of the income or loss allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions calculated under the fractional method as described above in this paragraph for the Plan Year,
times the number of calendar months between the end of the Plan Year and the date of distribution counting whole months only and treating distributions made on or before the 15th day of the month as made on the last day of the preceding month and
distributions made after the first 15 days of the month as occurring on the first day of the next month. Notwithstanding the preceding, the Committee may exclude gap period income so long as such exclusion is applied consistently to all Participants
and corrective distributions for the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-6

 
Plan Year. The income allowable to Excess Aggregate Contributions resulting from the recharacterization of Elective Contributions shall be determined and
distributed as if such recharacterized Elective Contributions had been distributed as Excess Contributions. 
 Notwithstanding the preceding
paragraph, the Committee may use any reasonable method for computing income allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions provided the method is non-discriminatory and is applied consistently to all Participants and corrective distributions for the
Plan Year. Such reasonable method may include or exclude gap period income. 
 K. Coordination with Section 401(a)(4) of the
Code. Matching Contributions attributable to Employee After-Tax Contributions or Elective Contributions which are returned to the Highly Compensated Employee shall not remain allocated to the Highly Compensated Employee. The distribution of a
matched Employee After-Tax Contribution or Elective Contribution to a Highly Compensated Employee must include the corresponding Matching Contribution. Unmatched Employee After-Tax Contributions shall be distributed first. To the extent necessary,
matched Employee After-Tax Contributions shall be distributed, in which case the distribution must be made proportionately from the matched and Matching Contributions. A Matching Contribution that is forfeited to cover an Excess Aggregate
Contribution is not taken into account under the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 If an Elective Contribution is returned to a Highly
Compensated Employee and a corresponding Matching Contribution relates to such Elective Contribution, the Committee may forfeit such Matching Contribution regardless of vesting in order to satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code. 
 L. Additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions. Rather than returning Excess Aggregate Contributions, the Committee, in its sole
discretion, may make additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions or may apply Elective Contributions to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation provided that the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective
Contributions that will be treated as Matching Contributions are made with respect to Employees who are Eligible Participants under the Plan. Furthermore, such contributions will be treated as Matching Contributions only if the additional
requirements described below are satisfied: 
 1. The Nonelective Employer Contributions including Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contributions treated as Matching Contributions shall satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1993 or such later effective date as determined by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue,
Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-7

 2. The Nonelective Employer Contributions excluding Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated
as Matching Contributions for the Contribution Percentage limitation and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated as Elective Contributions for the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation shall satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code
and for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1993, or such later effective date as determined by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 3. The Elective Contributions including those treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the Contribution Percentage limitation shall satisfy
Section 401(k)(3) of the Code. 
 4. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions
shall be allocated to the Employee within the Plan Year, and the Elective Contributions shall relate to Compensation for the Plan Year or Compensation that would have been received within 2 1/
2 months after the Plan Year and are allocated within the Plan Year. 
 5. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, the plan which treats Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions as Matching Contributions and the plan to which the Qualified
Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions are made must have the same Plan Year. If the Plan Year is changed to satisfy this requirement, such contributions may be taken into account during the short Plan Year if they satisfy the
allocation requirements for Elective Contributions. 
 6. If the Employer has elected to apply the prior year testing method to calculate the
Contribution Percentage limitation, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the last day of the Plan Year preceding the current Plan Year to satisfy the Contribution Percentage
limitation. If the Employer has elected to apply the current year testing method to calculate the Contribution Percentage limitation, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the close
of the current Plan Year to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-8

 M. Correction of Excess Aggregate Contribution Prior to the Plan Year. If the Committee determines
that the Contribution Percentage is being exceeded during the Plan Year, the Committee may suspend the group of Highly Compensated Employees by suspending Matching Contributions or Employee After-Tax Contributions or any other contributions which
result in additional contributions under Section 401(m) of the Code to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation. The Committee shall give notice to such Employees of the amounts to be reduced. The determination of the reduction shall be
made in accordance with the same method used for the return of Excess Aggregate Contributions or pro rata as elected in Article I. 
 N.
Coordination with Correction of Excess Contributions and Excess Deferrals. The determination of the amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions with respect to a Plan Year shall be made after determining the Excess Contribution, if any, to be
treated as an Employee After-Tax Contribution due to recharacterization under Section 401(k) of the Code for the Plan Year subject to Section 401(k) of the Code ending with the Plan Year being tested under Section 401(m) of the Code.
Excess Aggregate Contributions attributed to amounts other than Employee After-Tax Contributions, including forfeited Matching Contributions, shall be treated as Employer Contributions for purposes of Sections 404 and 415 of the Code even if
distributed from the Plan. 
 O. Prevention of Multiple Use. 
 1. Multiple Use Condition. Multiple use of the alternative limitation occurs if all of the following conditions of this Paragraph O are satisfied:

 (a) One (1) or more Highly Compensated Employees of the Employer or a Controlled Group are eligible both in a cash or deferred
arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code and in any plan maintained by such Employer subject to Section 401(m) of the Code. 
 (b) The sum of the Actual Deferral Percentage of the entire group of eligible Highly Compensated Employees under the arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code and the Average Contribution Percentage of the entire group of
eligible Highly Compensated Employees under the Plan subject to Section 401(m) of the Code exceeds the aggregate limit of Paragraph O.2 of this Article X. 
 (c) The Actual Deferral Percentage of the entire group of eligible Highly Compensated Employees under the arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code exceeds the 1.25 test as described in
Section 401(k)(3)(A)(ii)(l) of the Code. 
 (d) The Average Contribution Percentage of the entire group of eligible Highly Compensated
Employees under the arrangement subject to Section 401(m) of the Code exceeds the 1.25 test as described in Section 401(m)(2)(A)(i) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-9

 2. Aggregate Limit. For purposes of this Paragraph O, the aggregate limit is the greater of:

 (a) The sum of: 
 (i) 125% of
the greater of (A) the Actual Deferral Percentage of the group of Non-Highly Compensated Employees eligible under the arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code for the Plan Year; or (B) the Average Contribution Percentage of
the group of Non-Highly Compensated Employees eligible under the Plan Year subject to Section 401(m) of the Code for the Plan Year beginning with or within the Plan Year of the arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code; and

 (ii) Two (2) plus the lesser of clauses (A) or (B) of Paragraph O.2(a)(i) above. In no event, however, shall this amount
exceed 200% of the lesser of such clauses (A) or (B); or 
 (b) The sum of: 
 (i) 125% of the lesser of (A) the Actual Deferral Percentage of the group of eligible Non-Highly Compensated Employees under the arrangement subject
to Section 401(k) of the Code for the Plan Year; or (B) the Average Contribution Percentage of the group of eligible Non-Highly Compensated Employees under the Plan subject to Section 401(m) of the Code for the Plan Year beginning
with or within the Plan Year of the arrangement subject to Section 401(k) of the Code; and 
 (ii) Two (2) plus the greater of
clauses (A) or (B) of Paragraph O.2(b)(i) above. In no event, however, should this amount exceed 200% of the greater of such clauses (A) or (B). 
 The Actual Deferral Percentage and the Average Contribution Percentage of the group of eligible Highly Compensated Employees shall be determined after the use of Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and
Qualified Matching Contributions to meet the requirements of Section 401(k)(3)(A)(ii) of the Code and after using Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions to meet the requirements of Section 401(m)(2)(A) of
the Code. The Actual Deferral Percentage and the Average Contribution Percentage of the group of eligible Highly Compensated Employees shall be determined after any corrective distribution of Excess Deferrals, Excess Contributions or Excess
Aggregate Contributions and after any recharacterization of Excess Contributions required without regard to this paragraph. If 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-10

 
the Employer maintains two (2) or more plans subject to Section 401(k) or 401(m) of the Code, then multiple use shall be tested separately with
respect to each Section 401(k) arrangement and each plan or aggregate group of plans if the Section 401(k) arrangement and each plan subject to Section 401(m) of the Code are not aggregated. 
 If a multiple use of the alternative limitation occurs with respect to this Plan or with respect to two (2) or more plans or arrangements
maintained by the Employer, such multiple use shall be corrected by reducing the Actual Deferral Percentage or the Average Contribution Percentage of Highly Compensated Employees. The amount of the reduction to the Actual Deferral Percentage or the
Average Contribution Percentage of the entire group of Highly Compensated Employees shall be calculated in a manner consistent with the method as stated in this Plan. The Employer may elect to reduce the actual deferred ratios or the Contribution
Percentage ratios, as designated in Article I, either for all Highly Compensated Employees under the Plan and/or arrangements subject to the reduction or for only those Highly Compensated Employees who are eligible in both the arrangements subject
to Section 401(k) of the Code and the Plan subject to Section 401(m) of the Code. 
 Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, the
Employer may make Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions to correct the multiple limitations. 
 The restrictions of multiple use do
not apply if Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions are provided to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation or Safe Harbor Matching Contributions are either provided to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation or the
Contribution Percentage limitation, provided that the Plan does not provide for Employee After-Tax Contributions. 
 P. Aggregation Rules
for Section 401(m) Contributions. If the Employer maintains two (2) or more plans to which Employee After-Tax Contributions or Matching Contributions are made, then the plans may be considered as a single plan for purposes of determining
whether or not such plans satisfy Sections 401(a)(4), 401(m) or 410(b) of the Code, other than Section 410(b)(2)(A) of the Code. In such case, the aggregated plans must satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation with respect to the amount
of the Employee After-Tax Contributions and Matching Contributions and additionally must satisfy Sections 401(a)(4) and 410(b) of the Code as though such aggregated plans were a single plan. Whenever a Highly Compensated Employee is eligible under
two (2) or more plans of the Employer which are subject to Section 401(m) of the Code, in calculating the Contribution Percentage limitation, the actual contribution ratio of such Highly Compensated Employee will be determined by treating
all such plans in which such Highly Compensated Employee is an Eligible Participant as a single plan. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-11

 Except for certain plans in existence on November 1, 1977, for Plan Years beginning after
December 31, 1988, contributions allocated under a plan described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code cannot be combined with contributions or allocations under any plan not described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code including required
aggregation of a Highly Compensated Employee. However, a plan described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code may provide for contributions as described in Section 401(k)(12) of the Code. Mandatory disaggregation shall also apply to plans
described under Sections 1.401(m)-1(b)(3)(ii) and 1.401(k)-1(g)(11)(iii) of the Treasury Regulations. However, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1990, for purposes of the average benefit percentage test under
Section 410(b)(2)(A)(ii) of the Code, a plan described in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code shall be aggregated. For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1991, the Employer shall have the option to aggregate such plans for purposes of
the average benefit percentage test. Plans that are to be aggregated may only be aggregated if they have the same Plan Year. 
 The rules
regarding the aggregation and disaggregation of cash or deferred arrangements and plans shall also apply for purposes of Sections 401(k)(12) and 401(m)(11) of the Code. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE X	  	 X-12

 XI. LIFE INSURANCE POLICIES 
 A. Investment and Ownership of Life Insurance Policies. The Committee may direct the Trustee to purchase life insurance policies on the life of a
Participant or on a member of the Participant’s family or on the joint life expectancy of a Participant and a member of the Participant’s family. The Trustee shall be the applicant for any policies purchased, and each Participant for whom
such policy is purchased shall direct in writing that the Trustee shall be recognized by the insurer as the owner of the policy having the power to exercise all rights, privileges, options, elections and other incidents of ownership granted by or
permitted under the policy. The Trustee shall also be named as the Beneficiary in the application for such policy; provided, however, that the Participant shall have the right to nominate the Designated Beneficiary pursuant to Article IX of the
Plan. 
 B. Payment of Premiums. Upon receipt of notice of the premiums due the insurer for the initial premium on policies purchased
pursuant to this Article XI and upon direction of the Committee, the Trustee shall pay such premiums to said insurer. The policies shall be delivered to the Trustee, and any notices of premiums falling due under such policies thereafter shall be
addressed to and such premiums shall be paid by the Trustee. 
 C. Accounting for Policies. The value of any policies purchased by the
Trustee pursuant to this Article XI shall be included in the annual valuations of the Plan. 
 D. Discrimination. To the extent that
policies are purchased, there shall be no discrimination between Participants as to the form, optional methods of settlement, or other provisions of said policies. However, any Participant may refuse any offer to purchase contracts for his or her
benefit. Such refusal must be in writing and, when tendered, shall satisfy the anti-discrimination intent of the first sentence of this Paragraph D. 
 E. Disposition Upon Retirement or Total Disability. If any Participant with respect to whom a policy is held by the Trustee ceases to be a Participant as a result of termination of employment (other than by
death) on or after Normal Retirement Age or Total Disability, the Trustee pursuant to the direction and discretion of the Committee shall either (i) dispose of, or convert, such policy or policies to the extent necessary or desirable in order
that the proceeds of such disposition or conversion may be used to provide retirement or disability benefits to the Participant in accordance with the provisions of this Plan; or (ii) distribute such policy or policies to the Participant,
provided such policy complies with Paragraph B.4(b) of Article VII. 
 F. Disposition Upon Other Separation From Service. Death
benefits payable from policies on the life of a Participant shall cease as of the date of the Participant’s separation from service for any reason other than death, Total Disability or termination of employment on or after Normal Retirement
Age. In such event, the Trustee, subject to the direction and discretion of the Committee, shall make one (1) of the following dispositions of such policy or polices: 
 1. Surrender each such policy to cash or designate itself as Beneficiary of each such policy. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XI	  	 XI-1

 2. Offer to such Participant all such policies at a price (hereafter referred to as the “purchase
price”) equal to the cash value if the policy is whole life or accumulation value if the policy is interest sensitive or universal life. If the Participant accepts such offer, the purchase price shall be charged against his or her vested
interest in that portion of the value of his or her Accrued Benefit not represented by such policies, and any excess of such purchase price over such vested interest shall be paid by the Participant to the Trustee in cash within 10 days after
accepting such offer. If the offer is so accepted and any required payment made, the Trustee shall transfer ownership of such policies to such Participant. If such Participant does not accept such offer within 30 days after written notice from the
Committee, the Trustee shall take such action as the Committee may direct to liquidate such policies in order to distribute to such Participant the amount to which he or she is entitled pursuant to this Plan. 
 3. Effect a policy loan upon all such policies from the insurer on the sole security of the policies in an amount determined by applying to the then cash
value of each such policy a percentage equal to the excess of 100% over the percent vested in such Participant in accordance with the schedule of vesting set forth in this Plan. The loan proceeds shall go to and become the property of the Trust, and
the Trustee shall, after effecting such loan, deliver such policy to the Participant subject to such loan. 
 G. Policy Loans. Except
as provided in Paragraph F.3 of this Article XI, policy loans under the loan provisions, if any, may be made by the Trustee proportionately against all contracts held by the Trust and solely for the purpose of paying premiums under such contracts.
No loan shall be made on any policy on the life of any Participant to pay premiums on the life of any other Participant. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XI	  	 XI-2

 H. Insurer Not a Party. The insurer shall not be deemed a party to this Plan, and its obligation
shall be measured and determined solely by the terms of its policies. The insurer shall deal with the Trustee as the sole and absolute owner of the policies, and the insurer shall be under no obligation of inquiring or determining whether any action
or failure to act on the part of the Trustee is in accordance with or authorized by the terms of this Plan. The insurer shall be fully discharged from any and all liability for any action taken or any amount paid in accordance with the direction of
the Trustee, and the insurer shall not be obligated to see to the distribution or application of any money so paid. The insurer shall be fully discharged of all liability in dealing with the Trustee, as indicated on its records, until such time as
it shall receive satisfactory evidence of the appointment and acceptance of a successor Trustee. 
 I. Reserved. 
 J. Insurance Limitations. If the Committee directs the Trustee to purchase life insurance, the following limitations shall apply: 
 1. The cumulative premium for ordinary life insurance contracts shall be less than 50% of the aggregate Employer contributions allocated to any
Participant; 
 2. The cumulative premium for term and universal life insurance shall be less than 25% of the aggregate Employer
contributions allocated to any Participant; 
 3. The cumulative premium for a combination of ordinary life insurance and term and universal
life insurance contracts shall be less than 25% of the aggregate Employer contributions allocated to any Participant. However, for purposes of this Paragraph J.3, 50% of the premium paid for the ordinary life insurance policies shall be excluded
from the calculations. 
 4. If the level annual premiums (with respect to a Participant) required to be paid on account of life insurance
policies exceed the limitations described in this Paragraph J, then at the election of the Committee: 
 (a) Employee contributions of the
Participant, if available, shall be used to sustain the level of such premiums, and if not available, the insurer shall adjust the face amount of the policies to a basis consistent with the reduced contributions applicable to payment of premiums and
shall credit resulting excess cash values to succeeding premiums due under the policies; or 
 (b) The Committee may direct the Trustee to
request the insurer to convert the existing insurance policies to paid-up policies other than term insurance and issue new policies for the lower premiums at the attained age of the Participant; or to pay over the entire cash values to the Trustee
upon surrender of the policies. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XI	  	 XI-3

 XII. TRUST 
 A. Payment of Contributions. All contributions under this Plan shall be paid to the Trustee to be held in trust under a Trust Agreement executed by the Employer and the Trustee, which Trust Agreement shall be
incorporated herein by this reference. 
 B. Participant Directed Accounts. If allowed under Article I, each Participant shall have
the right and power to direct the investment of all assets of the designated Accounts which have been allocated to and set aside in his or her name. Such power to direct investments shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Trust
Agreement and shall not include the power to invest in “collectibles” as defined in Section 408(m) of the Code and may be limited as described in the following paragraph. 
 The Committee may establish nondiscriminatory rules and procedures relating to Participants directing investments, Participants selecting brokers,
Participants appointing investment managers and Plan fiduciaries meeting their duties under ERISA Section 404(c) and its regulations. 
 The Committee shall have the sole discretion to modify and replace any and all of these rules and procedures without further amendment to the Plan or Trust. The Committee shall notify the Trustee and Participants within a reasonable time
after the adoption of any change to these rules and procedures. Inactive Participants are solely responsible for informing the Committee of current addresses where changes in these rules and procedures may be sent. 
 The Participant’s right to direct the investment of their Accounts may be limited by the Committee’s selection of investment options. The
Committee shall have the sole discretion to delete or substitute investment options without further amendment to the Plan or Trust. Notice shall be given to Participants within a reasonable time after the adoption by the Committee of any changes in
investment options. Inactive Participants shall have the sole responsibility for keeping the Committee informed of their current addresses for the Committee’s use in informing such Inactive Participants of any changes in investment options.

  

					
		  	ARTICLE XII	  	 XII-1

 XIII. THE ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE 
 A. Committee Membership. The Sponsoring Employer shall appoint an administrative Committee of one (1) or more persons, some or all of whom
may be officers or involved in management of the Employer; provided, however, that the Committee may be comprised of members of the Board, and the Employer may designate its Board to serve as the Committee as the same may be constituted from time to
time. The Employer shall certify to the Trustee the names and specimen signatures of the members of the Committee. The Committee shall serve at the pleasure of the Employer and any members of the Committee may resign by written instrument addressed
to the Employer and may be removed by the Employer with or without cause. While a vacancy exists, the remaining member(s) of the Committee may perform any act which the Committee is authorized to perform. 
 B. Named Fiduciary and Plan Administration. The Sponsoring Employer is the named fiduciary, administrator of the Plan, and agent to receive
service of legal process and, except as otherwise provided for herein, shall have the authority to control and manage the operation and administration of the Plan. The Committee, as agent for the administrator and subject to the administrator’s
approval, shall make such rules, regulations, interpretations and computations and shall take such other action to administer the Plan as the Committee may deem appropriate in its sole discretion. The Committee shall administer the Plan in a
non-discriminatory manner consistent with the requirements of Section 401(a) of the Code. The Committee shall resolve by majority vote all questions involving the interpretation, application and administration of the Plan. The Committee’s
resolution of such questions shall be final and binding upon the Participants, their Beneficiaries, and the successors, assigns, heirs and personal representatives of any of them. Subject to the provisions of Paragraph B of Article XII and the
Committee’s right to delegate responsibility as set forth in the Trust, the Committee shall direct the investment of the assets of the Trust by written direction to the Trustee. 
 C. Compensation. The members of the Committee shall receive no compensation for acting as such, but the Employer shall reimburse the Committee for
all necessary and proper expenses incurred in administering this Plan. 
 D. Delegation of Duties. The Committee may, from time to
time, allocate to one (1) or more of its members and may delegate to any other persons or organizations any of its rights, powers, duties and responsibilities with respect to the operation and administration of the Plan. Any such allocation and
delegation of responsibilities shall be reviewed at least annually by the Committee and shall be revocable upon such notice as the Committee, in its sole discretion, deems reasonable and prudent under the circumstances. The Committee, on its own
behalf or on behalf of the Trustee, may employ such persons or organizations to render advice or perform services with respect to responsibilities of the Committee under the Plan as the Committee, in its sole discretion, 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE XIII	  	 XIII-1

 
determines to be necessary and appropriate; provided, however, that the Committee must employ an enrolled actuary to perform the actuarial functions required
by ERISA. Such persons or organizations may include, without limitation, attorneys, accountants and financial and administrative consultants. 
 All or any portion of the expenses incurred for such services or advice shall be borne by the Employer, if it so elects, and if the Employer does not so elect, such expenses shall be borne by the Trust. Expenses incurred for the
administration of the Plan shall be deemed a liability of the Plan until such time as the expenses are paid by the Plan either as direct payments to the service providers or as reimbursements to the Employer in cases where the Employer has directly
paid the service providers; provided, however, that reimbursements paid to the Employer must occur by the last day of the Plan Year following the later of the Plan Year during which such services were performed or the Plan Year during which the
Employer paid such expenses. 
 E. Bonding of Fiduciaries. The Committee shall be responsible for seeing that every fiduciary of the
Plan and Trust and every person who handles Trust assets shall be bonded to the extent required by the provisions of Section 412 of ERISA. The cost of such bond shall be paid by the Trustee out of Trust assets, upon direction of the Committee,
if the cost thereof shall not be timely paid by the Employer. 
 F. Action By Committee Members. If the Committee is comprised of more
than one (1) member, any one (1) member may execute any form, document or other paper on behalf of the Committee and thereby bind the Committee, if the Board or the other Committee members unanimously delegate such authority in writing.

  

					
		  	ARTICLE XIII	  	 XIII-2

 XIV. AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION; RETURN OF EMPLOYER 
 CONTRIBUTIONS; PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS 
 A. Amendment. The Sponsoring Employer reserves the right to amend this Plan by written instrument, at any time and from time to time, in whole or in part, including without limitation, retroactive amendments necessary or advisable to
qualify this Plan and the Trust under the provisions of Section 401(a) of the Code. However, no such amendment shall (i) reduce the Accrued Benefit of any Participant to the date the amendment is adopted, except to the extent that a
reduction may be permitted or required by ERISA and the Code; or (ii) divert any part of the Trust assets to purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants, retired Participants or their joint annuitants or Beneficiaries who
have an interest in the Plan or for the purpose of defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan. Further, no amendment of the Plan shall alter, change or modify the duties, powers or liabilities of the Trustee without its consent, or
permit any part of the Trust to be used to pay premiums or contributions of the Employer under any other plan maintained by the Employer for the benefit of its Employees. 
 If this Plan is an amendment and restatement of a prior Plan that provided for an optional form of benefit after July 30, 1994 that is not provided herein, and such form of benefit cannot be eliminated under
Section 411(d)(6) of the Code and Treasury Regulations issued pursuant thereto, then such optional form of benefit shall continue to be available under this Plan to the extent necessary to satisfy Section 411(d)(6) of the Code. 

B. Termination or Partial Termination or Complete Discontinuance of Contributions. The Employer has established the Plan with a bona fide
intention and expectation that it will be able to make contributions indefinitely. Nevertheless, the Employer is not and shall not be under any obligation or liability whatsoever to continue making contributions or to maintain the Plan for any given
length of time. The Employer may in its sole and exclusive discretion discontinue such contributions, or terminate or partially terminate the Plan in accordance with its provisions, the Code and ERISA, if applicable, at any time without any
liability whatsoever for any such discontinuance, termination or partial termination. If the Plan shall be terminated, partially terminated or the contributions of the Employer shall be completely discontinued, the rights of all affected
Participants in their Accrued Benefits shall thereupon become fully vested and nonforfeitable notwithstanding any other provisions of this Plan. However, the Trust shall continue until all Participants’ Accounts have been completely distributed
to or for the benefit of the Participants or their Designated Beneficiaries in accordance with this Plan, unless the Board specifies that distributions shall occur as a result of such Plan termination. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event the Plan is terminated, the administrative Committee shall remain in existence and all of the provisions of
the Plan 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE XIV	  	 XIV-1

 
which in the opinion of said Committee are necessary to effectuate the termination of the Plan and the administration and distribution of Plan benefits shall
remain in force. In addition, the Board of Directors and the Committee reserve the right to further amend or modify the Plan, including the adoption of any retroactive amendments or modifications, to the extent necessary or desirable to effectuate
the termination of the Plan or if necessary or appropriate to qualify or maintain the Plan and the Trust Fund as a plan and trust meeting the requirements of Sections 401(a) and 501(a) of the Code or any other applicable law (including ERISA) and
the Regulations issued thereunder, and any amendment necessary or advisable to conform the Plan to prior administrative practice shall be retroactive. 
 C. Return of Employer Contributions. Except as set forth in Paragraphs C.1, 2, 3 and 4 of this Article XIV, the assets of the Plan and Trust shall never inure to the benefit of the Employer and the same shall
be held for the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to Participants and their Designated Beneficiaries and defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan and Trust. 
 1. Mistake of Fact. If a contribution is made by the Employer by a mistake of fact, the Trustee shall, on written direction of the Committee,
return such contribution to the Employer, provided such return of contribution is made within one (1) year after the payment of such contribution. 
 2. Initial Qualification. Employer contributions shall be conditioned on the initial qualification of the Plan under Section 401 of the Code. If it is finally determined that the Plan is not initially
qualified by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, then such contributions shall be returned to the Employer no later than one (1) year after such final determination but only if the application for determination was filed by the time
prescribed by law for filing the Employer’s return for the taxable year in which the Plan is adopted or such later date as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe. 
 3. Deductibility. Employer contributions shall be conditioned upon the deductibility of such contributions under Section 404 of the Code. If
such deductions are disallowed, then such contributions (to the extent disallowed) shall be returned to the Employer no later than one (1) year after the final disallowance of the deductions. 
 4. Suspense Accounts. If, upon termination of the Plan, there remain Trust assets held in suspense accounts because of the application of
Section 415 of the Code, the Trustee shall return such assets to the Employer. 
 D. Procedure for Adoption and Withdrawal by
Participating Employers. 
 1. Adoption of the Plan. Any member or future member of the Controlled Group, which is not already a
Participating Employer under this Plan may, with the 

  

					
		  	ARTICLE XIV	  	 XIV-2

 
consent and approval of the Sponsoring Employer, adopt this Plan as a Participating Employer for all or any classification of persons in its employ. The
adoption of this Plan by a Participating Employer shall be effected by resolution of its board of directors or other written instrument if the Participating Employer is an Unincorporated Entity. It shall not be necessary for any adopting
Participating Employer to formally execute the Plan or Trust as then in effect. As to the Participating Employer, the effective date of its participation shall be stated in its resolutions, and it shall assume all the rights, obligations and
liabilities of a Participating Employer under the Plan and Trust. 
 2. Withdrawal from the Plan. At any time, a Participating
Employer, by resolution of its board of directors and notice to the Sponsoring Employer and Trustee, may withdraw from participation under the Plan. A withdrawing Participating Employer may arrange for the continuation of this Plan and Trust in a
separate form for its own employees. The withdrawing Participating Employer may arrange for continuation of the Plan and Trust by merger with an existing plan and trust and may request, subject to the Sponsoring Employer’s consent, the transfer
to such plan and trust of all Trust assets representing the benefits of its employees. 
 3. Continued Qualification of the Plan. The
Sponsoring Employer may request a determination from the appropriate District Director of the Internal Revenue Service to the effect that the Plan and Trust as adopted (and amended, as the case may be) by the Participating Employer continues to meet
the requirements of tax-qualified status. If such determination is denied, the adoption by the Participating Employer shall become void and inoperative and any contributions made by or for the Participating Employer shall be promptly refunded by the
Trustee. Furthermore, if the Plan or the Trust in its operation becomes disqualified under the Code for any reason because of the Plan’s adoption by any Participating Employer, the portion of the Trust allocable to Participants employed by such
Participating Employer shall be segregated as soon as is administratively feasible, pending the: 
 (a) Correction of the conditions which
caused the Plan’s disqualification to the satisfaction of the Internal Revenue Service; or 
 (b) Re-qualification of the Plan; or

 (c) Withdrawal of such Participating Employer from the Plan and a continuation by itself or its successor of a separate qualified plan,
or by merger with another existing qualified plan; or 
 (d) Termination of the Plan and Trust as to such Participating Employer and its
Employees. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XIV	  	 XIV-3

 XV. STANDARD OF CONDUCT OF FIDUCIARIES 
 A. Fiduciaries. Each member of the Board and of the Committee and any other person to whom any fiduciary responsibility with respect to the Plan
or Trust is allocated or delegated shall discharge his or her duties and responsibilities with respect to the Plan or Trust in accordance with the standards set forth in Section 401(a)(1) of ERISA and Paragraph B of this Article XV. 

B. Fiduciary Duties. Subject to Sections 403(c) and (d), 4042, and 4044 of ERISA, a fiduciary shall discharge his or her duties with respect to
the Plan solely in the interest of the Participants and Beneficiaries and: 
 1. For the exclusive purpose of: 
 (a) Providing benefits to Participants and their Beneficiaries; and 
 (b) Defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan; 
 2. With the care, skill, prudence and
diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims; 
 3. By diversifying the investments of the Plan so as to minimize the risk of large losses, unless under the circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do
so; and 
 4. In accordance with the documents and instruments governing the Plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent
with the provisions of this title. 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XV	  	 XV-1

 XVI. MERGERS, CONSOLIDATIONS AND TRANSFERS OF ASSETS 
 A. Merger or Consolidation of the Plan. If this Plan and its Trust merge or consolidate with, or transfer assets or liabilities to, any other
qualified plan of deferred compensation, no Participant shall, solely on account of such merger, consolidation or transfer, be entitled to a benefit on the date following such event which is less than the benefit to which he or she was entitled on
the date preceding such event, such benefits to be determined as if the Plan had terminated on the date preceding such event (except that there shall be no grant of full vesting). 
 B. Transfers From Other Qualified Plans – Rollovers. There may be transferred to the Trustee, subject to the approval of the Employer, all or
any of the assets held (whether by a trustee, custodian or otherwise) on behalf of any other plan which satisfies the applicable requirements of Section 401(a) of the Code, or any qualified Rollover Contributions which are maintained for the
benefit of any persons who are or are about to become Participants. The Employer may require proof that a prior determination was made by the Internal Revenue Service that such transfer will not affect the qualified status of the Plan and Trust. Any
such transfer of assets or Rollovers shall be held and administered in accordance with Article X of the Plan. 
 C. Transfer To Eligible
Retirement Plans. Upon direction of the Participant delivered to the Committee, the Trustee is hereby authorized to transfer the assets representing the Vested Accrued Benefit of any Participant under this Plan to the Trustee of an Eligible
Retirement Plan. 
 D. Transfer or Merger of Money Purchase Pension Plan to this Plan. Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to
the contrary, to the extent that any optional form of benefit under this Plan permits a distribution prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, disability, severance from employment or Plan termination, such optional form of benefit shall not be
available with respect to benefits attributable to assets (including the earnings thereon) and liabilities that are transferred, within the meaning of Section 414(l) of the Code, to this Plan from a money purchase pension plan qualified under
Section 401(a) of the Code (other than any portion of those assets and liabilities attributable to voluntary employee contributions). 
  

					
		  	ARTICLE XVI	  	 XV1-1

 XVII. MISCELLANEOUS 
 A. Limitation of Rights and Employment Relationship. Neither the establishment of the Plan and Trust nor any modification thereof, nor the creating of any fund or account, nor the payment of any benefits shall
be construed as giving to any Participant or other person any legal or equitable right against the Employer or the Trustee except as provided in the Plan and Trust Agreement; and in no event shall the terms of employment of any Employee or
Participant be modified or in any way be affected by the provisions of the Plan or Trust Agreement. 
 B. Payments to Missing Persons.
If the Trustee is unable to effect deliver of any distribution to the person entitled to receive it or, upon such person’s death, to such person’s Designated Beneficiary, it shall so advise the Committee and the Committee shall give
written notice to such person at his or her last known address as shown in the Employer’s records. If such person shall not have presented himself or herself to the Employer after one (1) year from the date of mailing such notice, then
such distribution shall be forfeited and applied to reduce current and future Employer contributions or allocated if Article I so provides. Alternatively, the Trustee shall have the discretion to use other means to protect the Participant’s or
Beneficiary’s vested Accrued Benefit. A missing Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit shall be reinstated if a claim is later made by the Participant or Beneficiary of the Participant for the forfeited benefit and such claim is approved by
the Committee. 
 C. Spendthrift Provisions. Except with respect to a Participant loan, neither the Employer nor the Trustee shall
recognize any transfer, mortgage, pledge, hypothecation, order or assignment by any Participant or Beneficiary of all or any part of his or her interest under the Plan and Trust. Any attempt by a Participant or Beneficiary to assign, alienate, sell,
transfer, pledge or encumber his or her benefits shall be void. A Participant’s or Beneficiary’s interest shall not be subject in any manner to transfer by operation of law, and shall be exempt from the claims of creditors or other
claimants (including but not limited to, debts, contracts, liabilities or torts) from all orders, decrees, levies, garnishments and/or executions and other legal or equitable process or proceedings against such Participant or Beneficiary to the full
extent which may be permitted by law. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Paragraph C shall also apply to the creation, assignment, or
recognition of a right to any benefit payable with respect to a Participant pursuant to a domestic relations order, unless such order is determined to be a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. The Committee shall determine whether any domestic
relations order submitted with respect to a Participant’s benefits is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order and shall establish procedures for making such determination and notifying interested parties of its ruling. A domestic relations order
entered into before January 1, 1985 (i) shall be treated as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order if the payment of benefits pursuant to the order has commenced as of such date; or (ii) at 

  

 1 

 
the Committee’s discretion, may be treated as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order if the payment of benefits has not commenced as of January 1,
1985, even though the order does not satisfy the requirements of Section 414(p) of the Code. 
 D. Indemnification. The Employer
shall indemnify and hold harmless the members of the Board of Directors and the Committee to whom any fiduciary responsibility with respect to the Plan is allocated or delegated, from and against any and all liabilities, costs and expenses incurred
by such persons as a result of any act, or omission to act, in connection with the performance of their duties, responsibilities and obligations under the Plan and under ERISA, other than such liabilities, costs and expenses as may result from the
bad faith or criminal acts of such persons. 
 E. Applicable Laws; Severability. The provisions of the Plan shall be construed and
enforced according to ERISA and the Code and, to the extent applicable, according to the laws of the state in which the Sponsoring Employer maintains its principal place of business; provided, further, that if any provision is susceptible to more
than one (1) interpretation, such interpretation shall be given thereto as is consistent with the Plan being a qualified employees’ profit sharing or pension plan within the meaning of the Code. If any provision of this instrument shall be
held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall continue to be fully effective. 
 The Employer has
executed this Plan on the          day of                     ,
200    . 
  

			
	PROFILE BANK, FSB
		
	By:	 	  

		
	Its:	 	  

		
	By:	 	  

		
	Its:	 	  

  

 2 

 FIRST AMENDMENT TO THE 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 401(k) PLAN 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB, a New Hampshire corporation (the “Employer”), hereby amends the 401(k) PLAN to be effective as specified below: 

1. The following paragraph is added to the Plan’s preamble: 
 “This amendment of the Plan is adopted to reflect certain provisions of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 (“EGTRRA”). This amendment is intended as good faith compliance with
the requirements of EGTRRA and is to be construed in accordance with EGTRRA and guidance issued thereunder. Except as otherwise provided, this amendment shall be effective as of the first day of the first Plan Year beginning after December 31,
2001. This amendment shall supersede the provisions of the Plan to the extent those provisions are inconsistent with the provisions of this amendment.” 
 2. Paragraph H.2 of Article I is amended to add the following: 
 “Effective on and after
January 1, 2002, catch-up contributions described in Paragraph D.2 of Article IV shall apply.” 
 3. If applicable, Paragraph M.4
of Article I is amended to replace 25% with 100% wherever it appears. 
 5. Paragraph V of Article I with respect to Matching Contributions
is not affected since the current vesting schedule for Matching Contributions satisfy Section 4II of the Code as amended by EGTRRA. 
 6. Paragraph BB of Article I is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “A Participant who receives a distribution of
Elective Contributions in calendar year 2001 on account of hardship shall be prohibited from making Elective Contributions and Employee After-Tax Contributions under this Plan and all other plans of the Employer for six (6) months after receipt
of the distribution or until January 1, 2002, if later.” 
  

 1 

 7. Paragraph DD of Article I is amended to add Paragraph DD.5: 
 “5. For distributions made after December 31, 2001 to Participants who have separated from service after December 31, 2001, this Plan
shall exclude Rollover Contributions (and earnings allocable thereto) in determining the value of the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit for purposes of the involuntary cash-out limit of $5,000.” 
 8. Paragraph EE of Article I is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “Distribution upon severance from employment shall apply for distributions after December 31, 2001 for severances from employment occurring after December 31, 2001.” 
 9. Paragraph A.11 of Article II is amended to add subparagraph (c): 
 “(c) For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the annual Compensation of each Participant taken into account in determining allocations for any Plan Year shall not exceed $200,000. The Compensation
Limitation shall be adjusted for cost-of-living increases in accordance with Section 401(a)(17)(B) of the Code. Annual Compensation means Compensation during the Plan Year or such other consecutive 12-month period over which Compensation is
otherwise determined under the Plan (the determination period). The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to annual Compensation for the determination period that begins with or within such calendar year.” 

10. Paragraph A.11 of Article II is amended to add a reference to subparagraph (c) in the last paragraph thereof. 
 11. Paragraph A.16 of Article II is amended to add the following sentence: 
 “Effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2001, Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation means $40,000 as adjusted for increases in the cost-of-living under Section 415(d) of the
Code.” 
 12. Paragraph A.28 of Article II is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “For distributions made after December 31, 2001, an Eligible Retirement Plan shall also mean an annuity contract described in
Section 403(b) of the Code and an eligible plan under Section 457(b) of the Code which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political 

  

 2 

 
subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan. An Eligible Retirement Plan shall also
apply in the case of a distribution made to a Surviving Spouse, or to a Spouse or former Spouse who is the alternate payee under a Qualified Domestic Relation Order.” 
 13. Paragraph A.29 of Article II is amended to add the following paragraphs: 
 “Notwithstanding the above, any amount that is distributed on account of hardship on and after January 1, 2002, shall not be an Eligible
Rollover Distribution and the Distributee may not elect to have any portion of such a distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan. 
 A portion of a distribution made after December 31, 2001 shall not fail to be an Eligible Rollover Distribution merely because the portion consists of Employee After-Tax Contributions which are not includible in gross income. However,
such portion may be transferred only to a traditional individual retirement account or annuity described in Section 408(a) or (b) of the Code, or to a qualified defined contribution plan described in Section 401(a) or 403(a) of the
Code that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible.”

 14. Paragraph D.2 of Article IV is amended to add the following: 
 “If provided in Paragraph H.2 of Article I, all Employees who are eligible to make Elective Contributions under this Plan and who have attained age
50 by the end of the taxable year shall be eligible to make catch-up contributions in accordance with, and subject to the limitations of, Section 414(v) of the Code. Such catch-up contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of
the provisions of the Plan implementing the required limitations of Sections 402(g) and 415 of the Code. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan implementing the requirements of Section 401(k)(3),
401(k)(11), 410(b), or 416 of the Code, as applicable, by reason of the making of such catch-up contributions.” 
 15. Paragraph H of
Article IV is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “Except to the extent permitted under H.2 of Article I as amended by this
amendment relating to catch-up contributions and Section 414(v) of the Code, if applicable, no Participant shall be permitted to have Elective Deferrals made under this Plan, or any other qualified plan maintained by the Employer during any
taxable year, in excess of the dollar limitation contained in Section 402(g) of the Code in effect for such taxable year.” 
  

 3 

 16. Paragraph P of Article IV is amended to add Paragraph P.7: 
 “7. If provided in Article I, this paragraph shall apply for distributions and severances from employment occurring after the dates specified in
Article I. A Participant’s Elective Contributions, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions, Qualified Matching Contributions, and earnings attributable to such contributions shall be distributed on account of the Participant’s
severance from employment. However, such distributions shall be subject to the other provisions of the Plan regarding distributions, other than provisions that require a separation from service before such amounts may be distributed.”

 17. Subparagraph Q.3(c) of Article IV is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, a Participant who receives a distribution of Elective Contributions after December 31, 2001, on
account of hardship shall be prohibited from making Elective Contributions and Employee After-Tax Contributions under this and all other plans of the Employer for six (6) months after receipt of the distribution. A Participant who receives a
distribution of Elective Contributions in calendar year 2001 on account of hardship shall be prohibited from making Elective Contributions and Employee After-Tax Contributions under this and all other plans of the Employer for the period specified
by the Employer in Article I.” 
 18. Paragraph E.1 of Article V is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “1. Dollar Amount and Percentage Limitations. Except to the extent permitted under H.2 of Article I as amended by this amendment relating to
catch-up contributions, and Section 414(v) of the Code, the Annual Addition to a Participant’s Accounts shall not exceed the lesser of: 
 (a) The Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation; or 
 (b) 100% of the Participant’s Section 415 Compensation for the
Limitation Year; provided, however, that this compensation limitation shall not apply to: 
 (i) Any contribution for medical benefits
(within the meaning of Section 401(h) or 419A(f)(2) of the Code) after separation from service which is otherwise treated as an Annual Addition; or 
 (ii) Any amount otherwise treated as an Annual Addition under Section 415(l)(1) of the Code. 
  

 4 

 (c) For purposes of applying the limitation described in this Paragraph E, Section 415 Compensation
shall include elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of Section 132(f)(4) of the Code.” 
 19. Paragraph B.3 of Article VI is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “If provided in Article I, for purposes of this
Paragraph B.3, the value of a Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit shall be determined without regard to that portion of the vested Accrued Benefit that is attributable to Rollover Contributions (and earnings allocable thereto). If the value of
the Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit as so determined is $5,000 or less, the Plan shall distribute the Participant’s entire vested Accrued Benefit.” 
 20. Paragraph H of Article VII is amended to add the following sentence to the second to last paragraph: 
 “Effective for Plan loans made after December 31, 2001, the preceding sentence prohibiting loans to any Owner-Employee or Shareholder-Employee shall cease to apply.” 
 The provisions of items 21 through 25 of this amendment shall apply for purposes of determining whether the Plan is a top-heavy plan under
Section 416(g) of the Code for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001 and whether the Plan satisfies the minimum benefits requirements of Section 416(c) of the Code for such years. 
 21. The following paragraph is added to the preamble of Article VIII: 
 “For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the top-heavy requirements of Section 416 of the Code and Paragraph E of this Article VIII shall not apply, if this Plan consists solely of a cash or
deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Section 401(k)(12) of the Code and Matching Contributions that comply with the requirements of Section 401(m)(11) of the Code. “ 
 22. Paragraph A.2 of Article VIII is amended for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001 to read as follows: 
 “Key Employee” means any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that
includes the Determination Date was (i) an officer of the Employer having Section 415 Compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Section 416(i)(1) of the Code for Plan Years 

  

 5 

 
beginning after December 31, 2002); (ii) a 5% Owner of the Employer; or (iii) a 1% Owner of the Employer having Section 415 Compensation
of more than $150,000. The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in accordance with Section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.” 
 23. Paragraph C.2 of Article VIII is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the present values of Accrued Benefits and Accounts of an Employee as of the Determination
Date shall be increased by the distributions made with respect to the Employee under the Plan and any plan aggregated with the Plan under Section 416(g)(2) of the Code during the one (1) year period ending on the Determination Date. The
preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the Plan under Section 416(g)(2)(A)(i) of the Code. In the case of a distribution made for a reason
other than separation from employment, death, or Total Disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting five (5) year period for one (1) year period.” 
 24. Paragraph C.5 of Article VIII is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, Accounts and Accrued Benefits of any individual who has not performed services for the
Employer during the one (1) year period ending on the Determination Date shall not be taken into account.” 
 25. Paragraph E.3 of
Article VIII is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, Matching
Contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the top-heavy minimum contribution requirements of Section 416(c)(2) of the Code and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to Matching Contributions under
this Plan or, if Article I provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan. Matching Contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as Matching
Contributions for purposes of the Contribution Percentage test and other requirements of Section 401(m) of the Code.” 
  

 6 

 26. Paragraph B of Article X is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “If provided in Article I, this Plan will accept Rollover Contributions and direct rollovers of distributions made after December 31, 2001,
from the types of plans specified in Article I, beginning on the effective date specified in Article I.” 
 27. Paragraph O of Article X
is amended to add Paragraph O.3: 
 “3. Repeal of Multiple Use. 
 For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the multiple use test described in Treasury Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2 and this Paragraph
O shall not apply.” 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Profile Bank, FSB has caused this First Amendment to be executed by its duly represented
officer, this      day of             , 20    . 
  

			
	 PROFILE BANK, FSB:

		
	 By:
	 	  

		
	 Title:
	 	  

  

 7 

 Second AMENDMENT TO THE 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 401(k) PLAN 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB, a New Hampshire corporation (the “Employer”), hereby amends the 401(k) PLAN to be effective as specified below: 

1. Paragraph K of Article I is amended to add the following paragraph: 
 “Effective for Plan Years beginning on and after 01/01/2005 and Limitation Years beginning on and after 01/01/2005, for purposes of the definition of Compensation under this Paragraph K, Paragraphs A.30, A.41 and
A.76 of Article II, Paragraph E.1 of Article V and Paragraphs A.2 and E of Article VIII, amounts under Section 125 of the Code include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant
is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage. An amount will be treated as an amount under Section 125 of the Code only if the Employer does not request or collect information regarding the Participant’s other health
coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan.” 
 2. Paragraph PP.4 of Article I is amended to add the following
paragraphs: 
 “Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph and any inconsistent provisions of the Plan, for purposes of determining required
minimum distributions for Distribution Calendar Years beginning with the 2003 calendar year, as well as required minimum distributions for the 2002 Distribution Calendar Year that are made on or after January 1, 2002, this Plan will apply the
minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) of the Code in accordance with Final and Temporary Regulations issued on April 17, 2002. 
 For purposes of this Paragraph PP.4 and Article VII, Distribution Calendar Year means a calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the
first Distribution Calendar Year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s required beginning date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first Distribution
Calendar Year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under subparagraph C.2(a) of Article VII. The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first Distribution Calendar Year will be made on or before the
Participant’s required beginning date. The required minimum distribution for other Distribution Calendar Years, including the required minimum distribution for the Distribution Calendar Year in which the Participant’s required beginning
date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that Distribution Calendar Year.” 
  

 1 

 3. Paragraph PP.5 is added to the Article I to read as follows: 
 “5. Election to Apply 5-Year Rule to Distributions to Designated Beneficiaries. The provisions of subparagraph C.2(a) of Article VII of the
Plan will not be modified.” 
 4. Paragraph PP.6 is added to the Article I to read as follows: 
 “6. Election to Allow Participants or Beneficiaries to elect the 5-Year Rule. Participants or Beneficiaries may not elect on an individual
basis whether the 5-year rule or the life expectancy rule in subparagraph C.2(a), (d), (e) and (f) of Article VII of the Plan applies to distributions after the death of a Participant who has a Designated Beneficiary.” 
 5. Paragraph PP.7 is added to the Article I to read as follows: 
 “7. Election to Allow Designated Beneficiary Receiving Distributions Under 5-Year Rule to Elect Life Expectancy Distributions. A Designated Beneficiary who is receiving payments under the 5-year rule may
not make a new election to receive payments under the life expectancy rule.” 
 6. Effective on and after the date specified in
Paragraph PP.4 of Article I, Paragraph B.9 of Article VII is amended to delete the last three (3) paragraphs. 
 7. The following new
Paragraphs are added as B.10, B.11 and B.12 of Article VII and the former Paragraph B.10 is redesignated as Paragraph B.13: 
 “10.
Coordination with Minimum Distribution Requirements Previously in Effect. If Article I specifies an effective date to apply the Final and Temporary Regulations under Section 401(a)(9) of the Code that is earlier than calendar years
beginning with the 2003 calendar year, required minimum distributions for 2002 under this Article VII will be determined as follows: 
 (a) If
the total amount of 2002 required minimum distributions under the Plan made to the Distributee or Designated Beneficiary prior to the effective date stated in Paragraph PP.4 of Article I equals or exceeds the required minimum distributions
determined after the effective date in such Paragraph, then no additional distributions will be required to be made for 2002 on or after such date to the Distributee or Designated Beneficiary. 
 (b) If the total amount of 2002 required minimum distributions under the Plan made to the Distributee or Designated Beneficiary prior to the effective
date of Paragraph PP.4 of Article I is less than the amount determined after the effective date of such Paragraph, then required minimum distributions 

  

 2 

 
for 2002 on and after such date will be determined so that the total amount of required minimum distributions for 2002 made to the Distributee or Designated
Beneficiary will be the amount determined after the effective date specified in Paragraph PP.4 of Article I. 
 Notwithstanding the other
provisions of this Article VII, distributions may be made under a designation made before January 1, 1984, in accordance with Section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA and the provisions of Paragraph G of this Article VII. 
 11. Amount of Required Minimum Distribution During the Participant’s Lifetime. During the Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount
that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year is the lesser of: 
 (a) the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s
account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Final Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the Distribution Calendar
Year; or 
 (b) if the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary for the Distribution Calendar Year is the Participant’s Spouse,
the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Final Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s and Spouse’s
attained ages as of the Participant’s and Spouse’s birthdays in the Distribution Calendar Year. 
 For purposes of Paragraphs B and
C of this Article VII, a Participant’s account balance shall equal his or her Accrued Benefit as of the last Valuation Date in the calendar year immediately preceding the Distribution Calendar Year (valuation calendar year) increased by the
amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation
Date. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the Distribution Calendar Year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar
year. 
 For purposes of required minimum distributions, life expectancy, where applicable, shall be computed by use of the Single Life Table
in Section 1.401(a)(9)-4 of the Final Treasury Regulations. 
 For the purposes of Paragraphs B and C of this Article VII, Designated
Beneficiary means the individual who is designated as the Beneficiary as described in Paragraph A.19 of Article II and is the Designated Beneficiary under Section 401(a)(9) of the Code and Section 1.401(a)(9)-1, Q&A-4, of the Treasury
regulations. 
  

 3 

 Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Paragraph B.11 beginning with the first
Distribution Calendar Year and up to and including the Distribution Calendar Year that includes the Participant’s date of death. 
 12.
Forms of Distribution. Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the required beginning date, as of the first Distribution Calendar Year
distributions will be made in accordance with Paragraph B.11 and subparagraphs C.2(b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) of this Article VII. If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance
company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the Final and Temporary Treasury Regulations issued on April 17, 2002.” 
 8. Paragraph C.2 of Article VII is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “2. Time of Distribution Upon Death. Upon the death of a Participant, the following distribution provisions shall apply: 
 (a) If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later
than as follows: 
 (i) If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the
Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, then, except as provided in Article I, distributions to the Surviving Spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died,
or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70 1/2, if later.

 (ii) If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, then, except as
provided in Article I, distributions to the Designated Beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died. 
 (iii) If there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the
Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death. 
 (iv) If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary and the Surviving Spouse dies after the 

  

 4 

 
Participant but before distributions to the Surviving Spouse begin, this subparagraph C.2(a), other than subparagraph C.2(a)(i), will apply as if the
Surviving Spouse were the Participant. 
 For purposes of this Paragraph C.2, unless subparagraph C.2(a)(iv) applies, distributions are
considered to begin on the Participant’s required beginning date. If subparagraph C.2(a)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under subparagraph C.2(a)(i). If
distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant’s required beginning date (or to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse before the date distributions are
required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under subparagraph C.2(a)(i)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence. 
 (b) If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the
Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the longer of the remaining life expectancy of the Participant or the remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary,
determined as follows: 
 (i) The Participant’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of
death, reduced by one (1) for each subsequent year. 
 (ii) If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole
Designated Beneficiary, the remaining life expectancy of the Surviving Spouse is calculated for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death using the Surviving Spouse’s age as of the Spouse’s birthday in
that year. For Distribution Calendar Years after the year of the Surviving Spouse’s death, the remaining life expectancy of the Surviving Spouse is calculated using the age of the Surviving Spouse as of the Spouse’s birthday in the
calendar year of the Spouse’s death, reduced by one (1) for each subsequent calendar year. 
 (iii) If the Participant’s
Surviving Spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, the Designated Beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the Beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death,
reduced by one (1) for each subsequent year. 
 (c) If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no
Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient
obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the Participant’s remaining life expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one (1) for each subsequent year. 
  

 5 

 (d) Except as provided in Article I, if the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and
there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the
remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary, determined as provided in subparagraph C.2(b) and (c) of the Article VII. 
 (e) If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the
Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death. 
 (f) If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, and the Surviving Spouse dies before distributions are
required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under subparagraph C.2(a)(i), then subparagraphs C.2(d), (c) and (f) of this Article VII will apply as if the Surviving Spouse were the Participant.” 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Profile Bank, FSB has caused this Second Amendment to be executed by its duly represented officer, this
     day of             , 20        . 
  

			
	PROFILE BANK, FSB:
		
	By:	 	  

		
	Title:	 	  

  

 6 

 THIRD AMENDMENT TO THE 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 401(k) PLAN 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB, a New Hampshire corporation (the “Employer”), hereby amends the 401(k) PLAN to be effective on and after March 28,
2005, as stated below: 
 Paragraph DD.1of Article I is amended to add the following: 
 “In the event of an involuntary cash-out distribution greater than $1,000 (including Rollover Contributions) in accordance with the provisions of
Paragraphs B of Article VI and B.5 of Article VII, if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in
accordance with Paragraphs HH of Article I and B.3 of Article VII, then the Committee will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Committee.” 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Profile Bank, FSB has caused this THIRD Amendment to be executed by its duly represented officer this     
day of              2005. 
  

			
	PROFILE BANK, FSB:
		
	By:	 	  

		
	Title:	 	  

 FOURTH AMENDMENT TO THE 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 401(k) PLAN 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB, a New Hampshire corporation (the “Employer”), hereby amends the 401(k) PLAN to be effective for the Plan Years beginning
after December 31, 2005 unless otherwise stated below: 
 1. Paragraph H.2 of Article I is not amended to allow for automatic enrollment.

 2. Paragraph H.3 of Article I is amended to add the following: 
 “For Plan Years beginning on and after December 31, 2005, the allocation of Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must satisfy the
additional requirements of subparagraph J.4(g) of Article IV and, if applicable, Paragraph L of Article X.” 
 3. Paragraph H.5 of
Article I is not amended because the Plan does not provide for Qualified Matching Contributions. 
 4. Paragraph M.1 of Article I is not
amended. 
 5. Paragraph M.3 of Article I is not amended. 
 6. Paragraph P of Article I is not amended. 
 7. Effective after December 31, 2005 Paragraph BB of
Article I is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “BB. Hardship Withdrawals. 
 Hardship withdrawals of Elective contributions and Matching contributions shall be allowed. For these purposes, an “event of hardship” means:

 Payment for (or necessary to obtain) medical care that would be described under Section 213(d) of the Code determined without regard
to whether the expenses exceed seven and one-half percent (7.5%) of adjusted gross income. 
 Cost directly related to the purchase of a
principal residence, but not including mortgage payments, by the Employee. 

 Payment of tuition, room and board, and related educational fees for up to the next 12 months of
post-secondary education for the Employee, the Employee’s Spouse, children or dependents (as defined in Section 152 of the Code, and for taxable years on or after January 1, 2005 without regard to Sections 152(b)(1), 152(b)(2) and 152
(d)(1)(B) of the Code). 
 The need to prevent eviction of the Employee from his or her principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage of
the Employee’s principal residence. 
 Payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Employee’s deceased parent, Spouse, children
or dependents (as defined in Section 152 of the Code, and for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2005 without regard to Section 152(d)(1)(B) of the Code). 
 Payments of expenses for the repair of damage to the Employee’s principal residence that would qualify for the casualty deduction under
Section 165 of the Code (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds ten percent (10%) of adjusted gross income). 
 8.
Paragraph A.3 of Article II is amended to delete the last three (3) paragraphs and substitute in its place the following paragraph: 
 “Elective Contributions that are treated as catch-up contributions pursuant to Section 414(v) of the Code because they exceed a statutory limit imposed by Section 401(a)(30), 402(h), 403(b), 408, 415(c) or 457(b)(2) of the
Code (without regard to Section 414(v) or 457((b)(3) of the Code) or an Employer-provided limit stated in Paragraph H.2 of Article I or J.6 of Article IV (without regard to Section 414(v) of the Code) are subtracted from the
Participant’s Elective Contributions for the Plan Year for purposes of determining such Participant’s actual deferral ratio.” 
 9. Paragraph A.25 of Article II is amended to add subparagraph (f) as follows: 
 “(f) Any catch-up contributions made
under Section 414(v) of the Code.” 
 10. Paragraph A.27 of Article II is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 

“Eligible Participant” means for purposes of computing the Actual Deferral Percentage, any Employee who is directly or indirectly
eligible to make an election to reduce and defer his or her Compensation under the Plan during all or a portion of a Plan Year, including (i) any Employee who would be a Participant but for the failure to make any Elective Contributions or
other required contributions; (ii) any Employee 

 
whose eligibility to make Elective Contributions has been suspended due to a hardship distribution or other distribution, a loan, or an election not to
participate, other than a one-time irrevocable election made no later than the Employee’s first becoming eligible under the Plan or any plan or arrangement of the Employer described in Section 219(g)(5)(A) of the Code (whether or not such
other plan or arrangement has terminated) to have contributions equal to a specified amount or percentage of Compensation (including no amount of Compensation) made by the Employer to this Plan and any other plan maintained by the Employer
(including plans not yet established) for the duration of the Employee’s employment; (iii) any Employee who is unable to receive an additional Annual Addition on account of Sections 415(c)(1) and 415(e) of the Code; and (iv) any
Employee who is unable to make an Elective Contribution because his or her Compensation is less than a stated dollar amount. 
 For purposes
of computing the Average Contribution Percentage, “Eligible Participant” means any Employee who is directly or indirectly eligible to make an Employee After-Tax Contribution or to receive an allocation of Matching Contributions, including
Matching Contributions derived from forfeitures under the Plan during all or a portion of a Plan Year including (i) any Employee who is unable to make an Employee After-Tax Contribution or receive an allocation of Matching Contributions merely
because his Compensation is less than a stated amount; (ii) any Employee who would be eligible to make Employee After-Tax Contributions or receive Matching Contributions except for a suspension due to a hardship distribution or other
distribution, a loan or an election not to participate in the Plan, other than a one-time irrevocable election made no later than the date the Employee first becomes eligible under the Plan or any plan or arrangement of the Employer described in
Section 219(g)(5)(A) of the Code not to be eligible to make Employee After-Tax Contributions or receive an allocation of Matching Contributions under the Plan or any other plan maintained by the Employer (including plans not yet established)
for the duration of the Employee’s employment; (iii) and any Employee who is unable to receive additional Annual Additions because of Sections 415(c)(1) and 415(e) of the Code.” 
 11. The last paragraph of Paragraph D.2 of Article IV is amended to read as follows: 
 “If provided in Paragraph H.2 of Article I, Employees who are eligible to make Elective Contributions under this Plan and who have attained age 50 by
the end of the calendar year shall be eligible to make catch-up contributions at the beginning of the calendar year in accordance with, and subject to the limitations of, Section 414(v) of the Code. Such catch-up contributions shall not be
taken into account for purposes of the provisions of the Plan implementing the required limitations of Sections 402(g) and 415(c) of the Code. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan implementing the
requirements of Section 401(a)(4), 401(k)(3), 401(k)(11), 410(b), or 416 of the Code, as applicable, by reason of making of such catch-up 

 
contributions. For purposes of Section 410(b) and the average benefit percentage test under Treasury Regulation Section 1.410(b)-5, catch-up
contributions for the current Plan Year are disregarded. However, catch-up contributions made to the Plan in prior years are taken into account for purposes of Section 410(b) and the average benefit test under Treasury Regulation
Section 1.410(b)-5. Those Plan provisions that relate to Section 1.414(v)-1(a) through (h) of the Treasury Regulations are effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003.” 
 12. Paragraph D of Article IV is amended to add subparagraph 5: 
 “5 Automatic Enrollment. The Employer may elect above to apply the automatic enrollment provisions. If elected, the following provisions shall apply: 
 (a) The Employer shall elect above to apply the automatic enrollment provisions either to current and future Participants or only to future Participants
hired on or after the automatic enrollment provisions are effective. If the Employer elects to have these provisions apply to current and future Participants, then the Employer will apply the automatic enrollment provisions to current Participants
who are deferring at less than the amount elected above, unless such Participants make an affirmative election to receive their Compensation in cash. 
 (b) After satisfying the Plan’s eligibility requirements, each affected Participant shall have his or her Compensation automatically reduced by the percentage elected above and such amount shall be contributed to
the Plan. 
 (c) Notwithstanding the foregoing, an election by a Participant not to make Elective Deferrals or to contribute a different
percentage may be made at any time. Such election, if filed when the Participant is hired, or within a reasonable time before the Compensation payable for the first pay period is currently made available, shall be effective for the first pay period
and subsequent pay periods until superseded by a subsequent Deferral Election, including an election to defer zero Compensation. Elections filed at a later date shall be effective for payroll periods beginning in the month next following the date
the election is filed with the Plan. 
 (d) If a Participant has Elective Deferrals withheld pursuant to automatic enrollment and no
investment directive has been received by the Plan, such Participant’s contributions shall be invested in accordance with Article I and XII of the Plan and the procedures established by the Committee. 
 (e) For current Participants who are deferring at a percentage or dollar amount less than the amount elected above, the Employer shall, in the first
payroll period after the date of the automatic provisions are effective, reduce the Participant’s Compensation by the difference between the Participant’s current Deferral Election and the amount elected above. 

 (f) At the time an Employee is hired, the Committee shall provide the Employee with a notice that
explains the automatic enrollment provisions. This notice shall also explain the Employee’s right to elect to have no Elective Contributions made to the Plan or to change the amount of his or her Elective Contributions. Such notice will include
the procedure for exercising the right and the timing for implementation of any such election. 
 (g) The Committee shall provide each
Participant in the Plan with an annual notice of his or her Elective Contribution percentage and each Participant’s right to change the percentage, including the procedure for exercising these rights and the timing for implementation of any
such election. Prior to a Participant with appropriate guidance as to the procedures then in effect for the Participant to make alternative elections referenced above. Each Participant deferring Compensation pursuant to the automatic enrollment
provisions shall be deemed to have consented to an Elective Deferral contribution in the amount specified by the Employer as provide above, unless he or she has filed an election to the contrary with the Committee. 
 (h) As stated above, Elective Deferrals made pursuant to the automatic enrollment provisions shall be treated as either pre-tax Elective Contributions
or Roth Contributions.” 
 13. The following sentence is added to the end of the third paragraph of Paragraph F.4 of Article IV:

 “For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006, the notice can only make references to the relevant portions of an up-to-date
summary plan description in regard to the content requirements of (ii), (iii) and (iv) of the preceding paragraph.” 
 14.
Paragraph H of Article IV is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “1. Deferral Limit For Catch-Up Contributions. The
applicable dollar limit under Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code (as increased under Section 402(g)(7) of the Code, to the extend applicable) shall be further increased by the applicable dollar catch-up limit as set forth in
Section 1.414(v)-1(c)(2) of the Treasury Regulations with respect to eligible Participants entitled to make catch-up contributions. 
 2. Deferral Limit For Multiple Plans. The preceding paragraph applies without regard to whether the applicable Employer plan (within the meaning of Section 414(v)(6) of the Code) treats the Elective Deferrals as catch-up
contributions. Thus, a 

 
catch-up eligible Participant who makes Elective Deferrals under applicable employer plans of two (2) or more Employers that in total exceed the
applicable dollar amount under Section 402(g)(1) of the Code by an amount that does not exceed the applicable dollar catch-up limit under either plan may exclude the Elective Deferrals from gross income, even if neither applicable Employer plan
treats those Elective Deferrals as catch-up contributions. 
 3. Adjustments in Deferral Limits. For taxable years beginning after
December 31, 2006, the limitations under Sections 402(g), Section 408(p)(2)(A)(ii) and 414(v) of the Code shall be adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as Section 415(d) of the Code, except the base period taken into
account shall be the calendar quarter beginning July 1, 2005, and any increase under this Paragraph H which is not a multiple of $500 shall be rounded to the next lowest multiple of $500.” 
 15. Paragraph J.2 of Article IV is amended to read as follows: 
 “2. Determination of Corrective Distributions. 
 (a) The determination of corrective
distributions shall be made as follows: 
 Step 1. The Committee shall calculate the dollar amount of Excess Contributions for each
affected Highly Compensated Employee in accordance with Section 401(k)(8)(B) of the Code and Section 1.401(k)-1(f)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 Step 2. The Committee shall determine the total of the dollar amounts calculated in step 1 (“total Excess Contributions”). 
 Step 3. The Elective Contributions of the Highly Compensate Employee with the highest dollar amount of Elective Contributions shall be reduced by
the amount required to cause such Highly Compensated Employee’s Elective Contributions to equal the dollar amount of the Elective Contributions of the Highly Compensated Employee with the next highest dollar amount of Elective Contributions.
This amount is then distributed to the Highly Compensated Employee with the highest dollar amount of Excess Contributions. However, if a lesser reduction, when added to the total dollar amount already described under this step, would equal the total
Excess Contributions, the lesser reduction amount is distributed. 
 Step 4. If the total amount distributed is less than the total
Excess Contributions, step 3 is repeated. 

 If the above distributions are made, the cash or deferred arrangement is treated as meeting the
non-discrimination test of Section 401(k)(3) of the Code regardless of whether the Actual Deferral Percentage, if recalculated after such distributions, would satisfy Section 401(k)(3) of the Code. 
 (b) Notwithstanding subparagraph (a) above, if the Plan fails the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation the amount to be refunded to a Participant
who is eligible to make catch-up contributions pursuant to Paragraph D of this Article IV is first offset by the amount of the dollar catch-up limit. The catch-up amount due to the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation is calculated after the Actual
Deferral Percentage limitation has been determined for the Plan Year. Amounts eligible for disbursement under Section 401(k)(8) or 408(k)(6)(C) of the Code must be re-categorized as catch-up contributions up to the dollar catch-up limit of
Section 414(v)(2)(B) of the Code. However, Elective Contributions that are not distributed because they are re-categorized as catch-up contributions are still considered to be Excess Contributions for purposes of Section 401(k)(8) of the
Code. Thus, Matching Contributions with respect to such Elective Contributions are permitted to be forfeited pursuant to Section 411(a)(3)(E) of the Code and Paragraph K of Article X provided that catch-up contributions are not matched pursuant
to Article I of the Plan. 
 (c) For purposes of determining the maximum amount of permitted catch-up contributions for a catch-up eligible
Participant, the determination of whether an Elective Contribution is a catch-up contribution is made as of the last day of the Plan Year (or in the case of Section 415 of the Code, as of the last day of the Limitation Year), except that, with
respect to Elective Contributions in excess of an applicable limit that is tested on the basis of the taxable year or calendar year (such as the limit of Section 401(a)(30) of the Code on Elective Deferrals), the determination of whether such
Elective Contributions are treated as catch-up contributions is made at the time they are deferred.” 
 16. Paragraph J.4 of Article IV
is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “4. Additional Requirements. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and
Qualified Matching Contributions which are treated as Elective Contributions must satisfy the following additional requirements: 
 (a) The
Nonelective Employer Contributions, including Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions, must satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 (b) The Nonelective Employer Contributions, excluding Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated as Elective Contributions for purposes of the
Actual Deferral Percentage limitation and Qualified Nonelective Employer 

 
Contributions treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the Contribution Percentage limitation, must satisfy the requirements of
Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 (c) If the Employer is applying the
special rule for employer-wide plans in Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations with respect to a cash or deferred arrangement, the determination of whether the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions satisfy the
requirements of subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this Paragraph J.4 must be made on an employer-wide basis regardless of whether the plans to which the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions are made are satisfying the requirements of
Section 410(b) of the Code on an employer-wide basis. Conversely, in the case of an employer that is treated as operating qualified separate lines of business, and does not apply the special rule for employer-wide plans in
Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations with respect to a cash or deferred arrangement, then the determination of whether the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions satisfy the requirements of this subparagraphs
(a) and (b) of this Paragraph J.4 is not permitted to be made on an employer-wide basis regardless of whether the plans to which the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions are made satisfy the requirements of Section 410(b) of
the Code on that basis. 
 (d) Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions made for the Plan Year must
satisfy the allocation requirements of Elective Contributions. 
 (e) The plan that takes Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and
Qualified Matching Contributions into account in determining whether Elective Contributions satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation must have the same Plan Year as the plan or plans to which the Qualified Matching Contributions and
Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions were made. If the Plan Year is changed to satisfy this requirement, such contributions may be taken into account during the Short Plan Year only if they could have been taken into account under the Actual
Deferred Percentage limitation for a plan with the same Short Plan Year. 
 (f) If the Employer has elected to apply the prior year testing
method to calculate the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Qualified Matching Contributions or Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the last day of the Plan Year preceding the
current Plan Year to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation. If the Employer has elected to apply the current year testing method to calculate the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Qualified Matching Contributions or Qualified
Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the close of the current Plan Year to satisfy the Actual Deferral limitation. 

 (g) Effective as stated in Article I, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions cannot be taken into
account for a Plan Year for a Non-Highly Compensated Participant to the extent such contributions exceed the product of that Non-Highly Compensated Participant’s Compensation and the greater of (i) five percent (5%) or (ii) two
(2) times the Plan’s representative contribution rate. Any Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution taken into account under the Contribution Percentage limitation under Paragraph L of Article X (including the determination of the
representative contribution rate for purposes Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(6)(v)(B) of the Treasury Regulations), is not taken into account for purposes of this Paragraph J.4 (including the determination of the representative contribution rate under
this subparagraph J.4(g)). 
 For purposes of this subparagraph J.4(g) the Plan’s representative contribution rate is the lowest
applicable contribution rate of any eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant among a group of eligible Non-highly Compensated Participants that consists of half of all eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participants for the Plan Year (or, if
greater, the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible Non Highly Compensated Participant in the group of all eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan Year and who is employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan
Year). 
 The applicable contribution rate for an eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant is the sum of the Qualified Matching
Contributions taken into account under this Paragraph J.4 for the eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan Year and the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions made for that eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the
Plan Year, divided by that eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant’s Compensation for such Plan Year. 
 Notwithstanding this
subparagraph J.4(g), Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions that are made in connection with an employee’s obligation to pay prevailing wages under the Davis-Bacon Act, the Service Contract Act of 1965 or similar legislation, can be taken
into account for a Plan Year to the extent such contributions do not exceed ten percent (10%) of such Non-Highly Compensated Participant’s Compensation. 
 (h) Qualified Matching Contributions satisfy this Paragraph J.4 only to the extent that such Qualified Matching Contributions are Matching Contributions that are not precluded from being taken into account under the
Contribution Percentage limitation for the Plan Year under the rules of Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(5)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 (i)
Qualified Matching Contributions and Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions can not be taken into account under this Paragraph J.4 to the 

 
extent such contributions are taken into account for purposes of satisfying any other Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Contribution Percentage
limitation, or the requirements of Sections 1.401(k)-3, 1.401(m)-3 or 1.401(k)-4 of the Treasury Regulations.” 
 17. Paragraph R of
Article IV is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “R. Aggregation of Employer’s Plans. 
 1. In General. Elective Contributions that are made under two (2) or more plans of the Employer that are aggregated for purposes of
Section 401(a)(4) or Section 410(b) of the Code, other than Section 410(b)(2)(A)(ii) of the Code, are to be treated as made under a single plan and if two (2) or more plans are permissibly aggregated for purposes of
Section 401(k) of the Code, the aggregated plans must satisfy Sections 401(a)(4), 401(k) and 410(b) of the Code as though such aggregated plans were a single plan. Whenever a Highly Compensated Employee is eligible under two (2) or more
plans of the Employer which are subject to Section 401(k) of the Code, in calculating the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, the actual deferral ratio of such Highly Compensated Employee will be determined by treating all such plans in
which such Highly Compensated Employee is an Eligible Participant as a single plan. 
 For purposes of this Paragraph R, the term plan means
a plan within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(a) and (b) of the Treasury Regulations, after application of the mandatory disaggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(c) of the Treasury Regulations and the permissive aggregation rules
of Section 1.410(b)-7(d) of the Treasury Regulations, as modified by Paragraph R.4 of this Article IV. Thus, if two (2) plans are treated as a single plan pursuant to the permissive aggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(d) of the
Treasury Regulations, then such plans are treated as a single plan for purposes of Sections 401(k) and 401(m) of the Code. 
 2. Plans
with Inconsistent 401(k) Testing Methods. In applying the permissive aggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(d) of the Treasury Regulations, an Employer may not aggregate plans within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(b) of the
Treasury Regulations that apply inconsistent testing methods. Thus, a plan that applies the current year testing method may not be aggregated with another plan of the Employer that applies the prior year testing method. Similarly, an Employer may
not aggregate a plan using the safe harbor provisions of Section 401(k)(12) of the Code and another plan that is required to be tested under Section 401(k)(3) of the Code. 
 3. Disaggregation of Plans and Separate Testing. If a cash or deferred arrangement is included in a plan within the meaning of
Section 1.410(b)-7(b) of the Treasury Regulations that is mandatorily disaggregated under Section 410(b) of the Code (as modified by Paragraph R.4 of this Article IV), the cash or deferred 

 
arrangement must be disaggregated in a consistent manner. Thus, in case of an Employer that is treated as operating qualified separate lines of business
under Section 414(r) of the Code, if eligible Employees under a cash or deferred arrangement that are in more than one qualified separate line of business, only those Employees within each qualified separate line of business may be taken into
account in determining whether each disaggregated portion of the plan complies with the requirements of Section 401(k) of the Code, unless the Employer is applying the special rule for employer-wide plans in Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of
the Treasury Regulations with respect to the plan. Similarly, if a cash or deferred arrangement under which Employees are permitted to participate before they have completed the minimum age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the
Code applies Section 410(b)(4)(B) of the Code for determining whether the plan complies with Section 410(b)(1) of the Code, then the arrangement must be treated as two separate arrangements, one comprising all eligible employees who have
met the age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the Code and one comprising all eligible Employees who have not met the age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the Code unless the Plan uses the rule that allows
for the aggregation of all eligible Employees regardless of age and service. 
 Restructuring under Section 1.401(a)(4)-9(c) of the
Treasury Regulations may not be used to satisfy the requirements of Section 401(k) of the Code. 
 4. Certain Disaggregation Rules
Not Applicable. The mandatory disaggregation rules relating to Section 401(k) plans and Section 401(m) plans set forth in Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(1) of the Treasury Regulations and an employee stock ownership plan and non-employee
stock ownership plan portions of a plan set forth in Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(2) of the Treasury Regulations shall not apply for purposes of this Paragraph R. Accordingly, notwithstanding Section 1.410(b)-7(d)(2) of the Treasury Regulations,
an employee stock ownership plan and a non-employee stock ownership plan which are different plans (within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(b)) of the Treasury Regulations) are permitted to be aggregated for purposes of Section 401(k) of
the Code. 
 5. Permissive aggregation of collective bargaining units. Notwithstanding the general rule under Section 410(b) of
the Code and Section 1.410(b)-7(c) of the Treasury Regulations, a plan that benefits Employees that are covered by a collective bargaining agreement and Employees who are not included in the collective bargaining unit are treated as comprising
separate plans. An Employer can treat two or more separate collective bargaining units as a single collective bargaining unit for purposes of this Paragraph R.5 and this Article IV, provided that the combination of units are determined on a basis
that is reasonably consistent from year to year. 
  

 6. Multiemployer plan. Notwithstanding Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(4)(ii)(C) of the Treasury
Regulations, the portion of the plan that is maintained pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement (within the meaning of Section 1.413-1(a)(2)) of the Treasury Regulations) is treated as a single plan maintained by a Single Employer that
employs all the Employees benefiting under the same benefit computation formula and covered pursuant to that collective bargaining agreement. The rules of Paragraph R.5 of this Article IV (including the permissive aggregation of collective
bargaining units) apply to the resulting deemed single plan in the same manner as if the Plan was a Single Employer Plan. The noncollectively bargained portion of the plan is treated as maintained by one or more Employers, depending on whether the
noncollectively bargaining unit employees who benefit under the plan are employed by one or more Employers. 
 7. Safe-Harbor
Contributions. The rules regarding aggregation and disaggregation of cash or deferred arrangements and plans shall also apply for purposes of Sections 401(k)(12) and 401(m)(11) of the Code. The anti-discrimination test under
Section 401(k)(3) of the Code shall apply to Employees who are eligible to make Elective Contributions but not yet eligible to receive Safe Harbor Matching Contributions or Safe Harbor Nonelective Employer Contributions.” 
 18. Effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003, Paragraph S and T is added to Article IV to read as follows: 
 “S. Universal Availability Requirements of Catch-Up Contributions. 
 1. General Rule. If the Employer maintains a plan that offers catch-up contributions and that is otherwise subject to Section 401(a)(4) of the
Code (including a plan that is subject to Section 401(a)(4) of the Code pursuant to Section 403(b)(12) of the Code), such plan will not satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(4) of the Code unless all catch-up eligible
Participants who participate under any plan maintained by the Employer are provided with an effective opportunity to make the same dollar amount of catch-up contributions. A plan fails to provide an effective opportunity to make catch-up
contributions if it has an applicable limit (e.g., an Employer-provided limit) that applies to a catch-up eligible Participant and does not permit the Participant to make Elective Deferrals in excess of that limit. An applicable Employer plan does
not fail to satisfy the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph S solely because an Employer-provided limit does not apply to all Employees or different limits apply to different groups of Employees as permitted by
Section 1.414(v)-1(b)(2)(i) of the Treasury Regulations. However, a plan may not provide lower Employer-provided limits for catch-up eligible Participants. 
 2. Payroll Period Exception. An applicable Employer plan does not fail to satisfy the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph S merely because 

 
the plan allows Participants to defer an amount equal to a specified percentage of Compensation for each payroll period and for each payroll period permits
each catch up eligible Participant to defer a pro-rata share of the applicable catch-up limit in addition to that amount. 
 3. Cash
Availability Exception. An Employer plan does not fail to satisfy the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph S merely because it restricts the Elective Deferrals of any Employee (including a catch-up eligible Participant) to
amounts available after other withholding from the Employee’s pay (e.g., after deduction of all applicable income and employment taxes). For this purpose, an Employer-provided limit of 75% of Compensation or higher will be treated as limiting
Employees to amounts available after other withholdings. 
 4. Class Exclusion Exception. An applicable employer does not fail to
satisfy the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph S merely because Employees described in Section 410(b)(3) of the Code are not provided the opportunity to make catch-up contributions. 
 5. Exception for Certain Types of Plans. An applicable Employer plan does not fail to satisfy the universal availability requirement merely
because another applicable Employer plan that is a Section 457 eligible governmental plan does not provide for catch-up contributions to the extent set forth in Sections 414(v)(6)(C) and 457(b)(3). 
 6. Acquisition and Disposition Exception. If an applicable Employer plan satisfies the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph S
before an acquisition or disposition described in Section 1.410(b)-2(f) of the Treasury Regulations and would fail to satisfy the universal availability requirement of this Paragraph because of such acquisition or disposition, then the
applicable Employer plan shall continue to be treated as satisfying the universal availability requirement through the end of the transition period described under Section 410(b)(6)(C)(ii) of the Code. 
 T. Multiple Plan Limits on Catch-Up Contributions. 
 1. General Rule. For purposes of Paragraph H of this Article IV, all applicable Employer plans, other than Section 457 eligible governmental plans, maintained by the same Employer are treated as one plan
and all Section 457 eligible governmental plans maintained by the same Employer are treated as one plan. Thus, the total amount of catch-up contributions under all applicable Employer plans of an Employer (other than Section 457 eligible
governmental plans) is limited to the applicable dollar catch-up limit for the relevant taxable year and the total amount of catch-up contributions for all Section 457 eligible governmental plans of an Employer is limited to the applicable
dollar catch-up limit for the relevant taxable year. 
  

 2. Coordination of Employer-Provided Limits within Plans. An applicable Employer plan is permitted
to allow a catch-up eligible Participant to defer in excess of an Employer-provided limit under that plan without regard to whether Elective Deferrals made by the Participant have been treated as catch-up contributions for the taxable year under
another applicable Employer plan aggregated with such plan under this Paragraph T. However, to the extent Elective Deferrals under another plan maintained by the Employer have already been treated as catch-up contributions during the taxable year,
the Elective Deferrals under the plan may be treated as catch-up contributions only up to the amount remaining under the catch-up limit for the taxable year. Any other Elective Deferrals that exceed the Employer-provided limit must satisfy the
benefits, rights and features current and effective availability requirements of Section 1.401(a)(4)-4 of the Treasury Regulations to the extent that the contributions are not catch-up contributions. Elective Deferrals in excess of the
Employer-provided limit are taken into account under the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation to the extent they are not catch-up contributions. 
 3. Allocation Rules. If a catch-up eligible Participant makes additional Elective Deferrals in excess of an applicable limit described in Paragraph H of this Article IV under more than one applicable Employer plan that is aggregated
under the rules of this Paragraph T, then the applicable Employer plan under which Elective Deferrals in excess of an applicable limit are treated as catch-up contributions is permitted to be determined in any manner that is not inconsistent with
the manner in which such amounts were actually deferred under the applicable plan.” 
 19. Effective for Plan Years beginning on and
after December 31, 2003, Paragraph C.8 is added to Article VIII as follows: 
 “8. Catch-Up Contributions. Catch-up
contributions made in accordance with Section 414(v) of the Code with respect to the current Plan Year are not taken into account for purposes of top-heavy testing under Section 416 of the Code. However, catch-up contributions made to the
Plan in prior years are taken into account in determining whether the Plan is top-heavy under Section 416 of the Code.” 
 20. The
following paragraph is added to Paragraph J of Article X as follows: 
 “For Plan Years in which Final Treasury Regulations under 401(k)
are effective but no later than Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2005, gap period income can only be excluded as permitted under Section 1.401(k)-2(b) of the Treasury Regulations. The income allowable to Excess Aggregate
Contributions resulting from the recharacterization of Elective Contributions shall be determined and distributed as if such recharacterized Elective Contributions had been distributed as Excess Contributions. If gap period income is required to be
allocated pursuant to Section 

 
1.401(k)-2(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations, the Committee may determine the income allocable to Excess Aggregated Contributions consistent with the
requirements of Section 1.401(k)-2(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations.” 
 21. Paragraph L of Article X is amended in its entirety
to read as follows: 
 “L. Additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions. Rather than returning Excess Aggregate
Contributions, the Committee, in its sole discretion, may make additional Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions or may apply Elective Contributions to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation provided that the Qualified Nonelective
Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions that will be treated as Matching Contributions are made with respect to Employees who are Eligible Participants under the Plan. 
 1. Conditions for Additional QNECs. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions will be treated as Matching Contributions only if the additional
requirements described below are satisfied: 
 (a) The Nonelective Employer Contributions including Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contributions treated as Matching Contributions shall satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 (b) The Nonelective Employer Contributions excluding Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions treated as Matching Contributions for the Contribution Percentage limitation and Qualified Nonelective Employer
Contributions treated as Elective Contributions for the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation shall satisfy Section 401(a)(4) of the Code and Section 1.401(a)(4)-1(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations. 
 (c) If the Employer is applying the special rule for employer-wide plans in Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations with respect
to a cash or deferred arrangement, the determination of whether the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions satisfy the requirements of subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this Paragraph L must be made on an employer-wide basis regardless of
whether the plans to which the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions are made are satisfying the requirements of Section 410(b) of the Code on an employer-wide basis. Conversely, in the case of an employer that is treated as operating
qualified separate lines of business, and does not apply the special rule for employer-wide plans in Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations with respect to a cash or deferred arrangement, then the determination of whether the
Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions satisfy the requirements of subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this Paragraph L is not permitted to be made on an employer-wide basis regardless of whether the plans to which the Qualified Nonelective
Employer Contributions are made are satisfying the requirements of Section 410(b) of the Code on that basis. 

 (d) The Elective Contributions including those treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the
Contribution Percentage limitation shall satisfy Section 401(k)(3) of the Code. 
 (e) Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions shall be allocated to the Employee within the Plan Year, and the Elective Contributions shall relate to Compensation for the Plan Year or Compensation that would have been received
within 2 1/2 months after the Plan Year and are allocated within the Plan Year. 
 (f) The plan which treats Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions as Matching Contributions and the plan to which the
Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions and Elective Contributions are made must have the same Plan Year. If the Plan Year is changed to satisfy this requirement, such contributions may be taken into account during the Short Plan Years only if
they could have been taken into account under the Contribution Percentage limitation for a plan with the same Short Plan Year. 
 (g) If the
Employer has elected to apply the prior year testing method to calculate the Contribution Percentage limitation, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the last day of the Plan Year
preceding the current Plan Year to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation. If the Employer has elected to apply the current year testing method to calculate the Contribution Percentage limitation, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions
must be made no later than twelve (12) months following the close of the current Plan Year to satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation. 
 (h) Effective as stated in Article I, Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions cannot be taken into account for a Plan Year for a Non-Highly Compensated Participant to the extent such contributions exceed the product of that Non-Highly
Compensated Participant’s Compensation and the greater of (i) five percent (5%) or (ii) two (2) times the Plan’s representative contribution rate. Any Qualified Nonelective Employer Contribution taken into account under
the Actual Deferral Percentage limitation under Paragraph J.4 of Article IV (including the determination of the representative contribution rate for purposes Section 1.401(k)-2(a)(6)(iv)(B) of the Treasury Regulations), is not taken into
account for purposes of this Paragraph L (including the determination of the representative contribution rate for purposes of this subparagraph (h)). 
 For purposes of this subparagraph (h), the Plan’s representative contribution rate is the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible Non-Highly Compensated 

 
Participant among a group of eligible Non-highly Compensated Participants that consists of half of all eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participants for the
Plan Year (or, if greater, the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible Non Highly Compensated Participant in the group of all eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan Year and who is employed by the Employer on the last
day of the Plan Year). 
 The applicable contribution rate for an eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant is the sum of the Matching
Contributions taken into account under this Paragraph L for the eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan Year and the Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions made for that eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan
Year, divided by that eligible Non-Highly Compensated Participant’s Compensation for such Plan Year. 
 Notwithstanding this
subparagraph (h), Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions that are made in connection with an Employer’s obligation to pay prevailing wages under the Davis-Bacon Act, Service Contract of 1965 or similar legislation, can be taken into
account for a Plan Year to the extent such contributions do not exceed ten percent (10%) of the Non-Highly Compensated Participant’s Compensation. 
 2. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions Not Taken Into Account. Qualified Nonelective Employer Contributions can not be taken into account under this Paragraph L to the extent such contributions are
taken into account for purposes of satisfying any other Actual Deferral Percentage limitation, Contribution Percentage limitation, or the requirements of Sections 1.401(k)-3, 1.401(m)-3 or 1.401(k)-4 of the Treasury Regulations. 
 22. Paragraph P of Article X is amended in its entirety to read as follows: 
 “P Aggregation Rules for Section 401(m) Contributions. 
 1. In General. If the
Employer maintains two (2) or more plans to which Employee After-Tax Contributions or Matching Contributions are made, then the plans may be considered as a single plan for purposes of determining whether or not such plans satisfy
Sections 401(a)(4), 401(m) or 410(b) of the Code, other than Section 410(b)(2)(A) of the Code. In such case, the aggregated plans must satisfy the Contribution Percentage limitation with respect to the amount of the Employee After-Tax
Contributions and Matching Contributions and additionally must satisfy Sections 401(a)(4) and 410(b) of the Code as though such aggregated plans were a single plan. Whenever a Highly Compensated Employee is eligible under two (2) or more
plans of the Employer which are subject to Section 401(m) of the Code, in calculating the Contribution Percentage limitation, the actual contribution ratio of such Highly Compensated Employee will be determined by treating all such plans in
which such Highly Compensated Employee is an Eligible Participant as a single plan. 

 For purposes of this Paragraph P, the term plan means a plan within the meaning of
Section 1.410(b)-7(a) and (b) of the Treasury Regulations, after application of the mandatory disaggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(c) of the Treasury Regulations and the permissive aggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(d)
of the Treasury Regulations, as modified by Paragraph P.4 of this Article X. Thus, if two (2) plans are treated as a single plan pursuant to the permissive aggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(d) of the Treasury Regulations, then such
plans are treated as a single plan for purposes of Sections 401(k) and 401(m) of the Code. 
 2. Plans with Inconsistent 401(k) Testing
Methods. In applying the permissive aggregation rules of Section 1.410(b)-7(d) of the Treasury Regulations, an Employer may not aggregate plans within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(b) of the Treasury Regulations that apply
inconsistent testing methods. Thus, a plan that applies the current year testing method may not be aggregated with another plan of the Employer that applies the prior year testing method. Similarly, an Employer may not aggregate a plan using the
safe harbor provisions of Section 401(m)(11) of the Code and another plan that is required to be tested under Section 401(m)(2) of the Code. 
 3. Disaggregation of Plans and Separate Testing. If Employee After-Tax Contributions or Matching Contributions are included in a plan within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(b) of the Treasury Regulations
that is mandatorily disaggregated under Section 410(b) of the Code (as modified by Paragraph P.4 of this Article X), the Employee After-Tax Contributions or Matching Contributions must be disaggregated in a consistent manner. Thus, in case of
an Employer that is treated as operating qualified separate lines of business under Section 414(r) of the Code, if eligible Employees under a plan which provides for Employee After-Tax Contributions or Matching Contributions are in more than
one qualified separate line of business, only those Employees within each qualified separate line of business may be taken into account in determining whether each disaggregated portion of the plan complies with the requirements of
Section 401(m) of the Code, unless the Employer is applying the special rule for employer-wide plans in Section 1.414(r)-1(c)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations with respect to the plan. Similarly, if a plan provides for Employee After-Tax
Contributions or Matching Contributions under which Employees are permitted to participate before they have completed the minimum age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the Code applies Section 410(b)(4)(B) of the Code for
determining whether the plan complies with Section 410(b)(1) of the Code, then the plan must be treated as two separate plans, one comprising all eligible employees who have met the age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the
Code and one comprising all eligible Employees who have not met the age and service requirements of Section 410(a)(1) of the Code unless the Plan uses the rule that allows for the aggregation of all eligible Employees regardless of age and
service. 

 Restructuring under Section 1.401(a)(4)-9(c) of the Treasury Regulations may not be used to satisfy
the requirements of Section 401(m) of the Code. 
 4. Certain Disaggregation Rules Not Applicable. The mandatory disaggregation
rules relating to Section 401(k) plans and Section 401(m) plans set forth in Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(1) of the Treasury Regulations and an employee stock ownership plan and non-employee stock ownership plan portions of a plan set forth
in Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(2) of the Treasury Regulations shall not apply for purposes of this Paragraph P. Accordingly, notwithstanding Section 1.410(b)-7(d)(2) of the Treasury Regulations, an employee stock ownership plan and a
non-employee stock ownership plan which are different plans (within the meaning of Section 1.410(b)-7(b)) of the Treasury Regulations) are permitted to be aggregated for purposes of Section 401(m) of the Code.” 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer has caused this Fourth Amendment to be executed by its duly represented officer, this     
day of             , 20    . 
  

			
	 PROFILE BANK, FSB:

		
	 By:
	 	  

		
	 Its:Exhibit 10.4

 Exhibit 10.4 
 FORM OF 
 PROFILE BANCORP, INC. 
 EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT 
 THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), made
this      day of             , 2007, by and between PROFILE BANCORP, INC., a federally chartered corporation (the “Company”), and
[Name] (“Executive”). 
 WHEREAS, Executive serves in a position of substantial responsibility; and 
 WHEREAS, the Company wishes to assure Executive’s services for the term of this Agreement; and 
 WHEREAS, Executive is willing to serve in the employ of the Company during the term of this Agreement. 
 NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained in this Agreement, and upon the other terms and conditions provided for in this
Agreement, the parties hereby agree as follows: 
 1. Employment. The Company will employ Executive as [position].
Executive will perform all duties and shall have all powers commonly incident to his position, including [position details] or which, consistent with his position, the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board”) delegates to
Executive. Executive also agrees to serve, if elected, as an officer and/or director of any subsidiary or affiliate of the Company and to carry out the duties and responsibilities reasonably appropriate to those offices. 
 2. Location and Facilities. The Company will furnish Executive with the working facilities and staff customary for executive officers with
the titles and duties set forth in Section 1 and as are necessary for him to perform his duties. The location of such facilities and staff shall be at the principal administrative offices of the Company and Profile Bank, FSB (the
“Bank”), or at such other site or sites customary for such offices. 
 3. Term. 
  

	 	a.	The term of this Agreement shall include: (i) the initial term, consisting of the period commencing on the date of this Agreement (the “Effective Date”) and ending on
the [third] anniversary of the Effective Date, plus (ii) any and all extensions of the initial term made pursuant to this Section 3. 

  

	 	b.	Commencing on the first anniversary of the Effective Date and continuing on each anniversary of the Effective Date thereafter, the disinterested members of the Board may extend the
Agreement term for an additional year, so that the remaining term of the Agreement again becomes [thirty-six (36)] months, unless Executive elects not to extend the term of this Agreement by giving written notice in accordance with
Section 18 of this Agreement. The Board will review the Agreement and Executive’s performance annually for purposes of determining whether to extend the Agreement term and will include the rationale and results of its review in the minutes
of its meeting. The Board will notify Executive as soon as possible after its annual review whether it has determined to extend the Agreement. 

 4. Base Compensation. 
  

	 	a.	For his services as [position], the Company agrees to pay Executive an annual base salary at the rate of $[amount] per year, payable in accordance with customary
payroll practices. 

  

	 	b.	During the term of this Agreement, the Board will review the level of Executive’s base salary at least annually, based upon factors deemed relevant, in order to determine
Executive’s base salary through the remaining term of the Agreement. 

 5. Bonuses. Executive will
participate in discretionary bonuses or other incentive compensation programs that the Company or the Bank may sponsor for or award from time to time to senior management employees. 
 6. Benefit Plans. Executive will participate in life insurance, medical, dental, pension, profit sharing, retirement and stock-based
compensation plans and other programs and arrangements that the Company or the Bank may sponsor or maintain for the benefit of their employees. 
 7. Vacations and Leave. 
  

	 	a.	Executive may take vacations and other leave in accordance with applicable policy for senior executives, or otherwise as approved by the Board. 

  

	 	b.	In addition to paid vacations and other leave, the Board may grant Executive a leave or leaves of absence, with or without pay, at such time or times and upon such terms and
conditions as the Board, in its discretion, may determine. 

 8. Expense Payments and Reimbursements. The Company
will reimburse Executive for all reasonable out-of-pocket business expenses incurred in connection with his services under this Agreement upon substantiation of such expenses in accordance with applicable policies of the Company. 
 9. Loyalty and Confidentiality. 
  

	 	a.	During the term of this Agreement, Executive will devote all his business time, attention, skill, and efforts to the faithful performance of his duties under this Agreement;
provided, however, that from time to time, Executive may serve on the boards of directors of, and hold any other offices or positions in, companies or organizations that will not present any conflict of interest with the Company or any of its
subsidiaries or affiliates, unfavorably affect the performance of Executive’s duties pursuant to this Agreement, or violate any applicable statute or regulation. Executive will not engage in any business or activity contrary to the business
affairs or interests of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates. 

  

	 	b.	Nothing contained in this Agreement will prevent or limit Executive’s right to invest in the capital stock or other securities or interests of any business dissimilar from that
of the Company, or, solely as a passive, minority investor, in any business. 

  

	 	c.	 Executive agrees to maintain the confidentiality of any and all information concerning the operations or financial status of the Company and its affiliates; the
names or addresses of any borrowers, depositors and other customers; any information concerning or obtained from such customers; and any other information concerning the Company or its affiliates to which he may be exposed during the course of his
employment. Executive further agrees that, unless 

  

 2 

	 	 
required by law or specifically permitted by the Board in writing, he will not disclose to any person or entity, either during or subsequent to his
employment, any of the above-mentioned information which is not generally known to the public, nor will he use the information in any way other than for the benefit of the Company or its affiliates. 

 10. Termination and Termination Pay. Subject to Section 11 of this Agreement, Executive’s employment under this Agreement may be
terminated in the following circumstances: 
  

	 	a.	Death. Executive’s employment under this Agreement will terminate upon his death during the term of this Agreement, in which event Executive’s estate will receive
the compensation due to Executive through the last day of the calendar month in which his death occurred. 

  

	 	b.	Retirement. This Agreement will terminate upon Executive’s retirement on or after age 65. 

  

	 	c.	Disability. 

  

	 	i.	The Board or Executive may terminate Executive’s employment after having determined Executive has a Disability. For purposes of this Agreement, “Disability” means a
physical or mental infirmity that impairs Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement and results in Executive becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under any long-term disability plans of the
Company or the Bank (or, if no such plans exist, that impairs Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement for a period of one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days). The Board will determine whether or not
Executive is and continues to be permanently disabled for purposes of this Agreement in good faith, based upon competent medical advice and other factors that the Board reasonably believes to be relevant. As a condition to any benefits, the Board
may require Executive to submit to physical or mental evaluations and tests as the Board or its medical experts deem reasonably appropriate. 

  

	 	ii.	In the event of his Disability, Executive will no longer be obligated to perform services under this Agreement. The Company will pay Executive, as Disability pay, an amount equal to
[one hundred percent (100%)] of Executive’s rate of base salary in effect as of the date of his termination of employment due to Disability. The Company will make Disability payments on a monthly basis commencing on the first day of the
month following the effective date of Executive’s termination of employment due to Disability and ending on the earlier of: (A) the date he returns to full-time employment in the same capacity as he was employed prior to his termination
for Disability; (B) his death; (C) his attainment of age 65; or (D) the date this Agreement would have expired had Executive’s employment not terminated by reason of Disability. The Company will reduce Disability payments by the
amount of any short- or long-term disability benefits payable to Executive under any other disability programs sponsored by the Company. In addition, during any period of Executive’s Disability, the Company will continue to provide Executive
and his dependents, to the greatest extent possible, with continued coverage under all benefit plans (including, without limitation, retirement plans and medical, dental and life insurance plans) in which Executive and/or his dependents participated
prior to his Disability on the same terms as if he remained actively employed by the Company. 

  

 3 

	 	d.	Termination for Cause. 

  

	 	i.	The Board may, by written notice to Executive in the form and manner specified in this paragraph, immediately terminate his employment at any time for “Cause.” Executive
shall have no right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after termination for Cause, except for already vested benefits. Termination for Cause shall mean termination because of, in the good faith determination of the Board,
Executive’s: 

  

	 	(1)	Personal dishonesty; 

  

	 	(2)	Incompetence; 

  

	 	(3)	Willful misconduct; 

  

	 	(4)	Breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit; 

  

	 	(5)	Intentional failure to perform stated duties; 

  

	 	(6)	Willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order; or 

  

	 	(7)	Material breach of any provision of this Agreement. 

  

	 	ii.	Notwithstanding the foregoing, Executive’s termination for Cause will not become effective unless the Company has delivered to Executive a copy of a resolution duly adopted by
the affirmative vote of a majority of the entire membership of the Board, at a meeting of the Board called and held for the purpose of finding that, in the good faith opinion of the Board (after reasonable notice to Executive and an opportunity for
Executive to be heard before the Board with counsel), Executive engaged in of the conduct described above and specifying the particulars of this conduct. 

  

	 	e.	Voluntary Termination by Executive. In addition to his other rights to terminate under this Agreement, Executive may voluntarily terminate employment during the term of this
Agreement upon at least sixty (60) days prior written notice to the Board. Upon Executive’s voluntary termination, he will receive only his compensation and vested rights and benefits through the date of his termination. Following his
voluntary termination of employment under this Section 10(e), Executive will be subject to the restrictions set forth in Section 10(g) of this Agreement for a period of one (1) year from his termination date. 

 

	 	f.	Without Cause or With Good Reason. 

  

	 	i.	In addition to termination pursuant to Sections 10(a) through 10(e), the Board may, by written notice to Executive, immediately terminate his employment at any time for a reason
other than Cause (a termination “Without Cause”) and Executive may, by written notice to the Board, immediately terminate this Agreement at any time within ninety (90) days following an event constituting “Good Reason,” as
defined below (a termination “With Good Reason”). 

  

 4 

	 	ii.	Subject to Section 11 of this Agreement, in the event of termination under this Section 10(f), Executive will receive his base salary as of his termination date for the
remaining term of the Agreement, with such amount paid in one lump sum within ten (10) calendar days of his termination. Executive will also continue to participate in any benefit plans of the Company or the Bank that provide medical, dental
and life insurance coverage for the remaining term of the Agreement, under terms and conditions no less favorable than the most favorable terms and conditions provided to senior executives during the same period. If the Company or the Bank cannot
provide such coverage because Executive is no longer an employee, the Company or the Bank will provide Executive with comparable coverage on an individual policy basis or the cash equivalent; provided, however, that to the extent required under
Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), and the regulations issued thereunder, the aggregate payments received for such insurance continuation coverage shall not exceed the applicable dollar
limitation under Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code for the year in which Executive terminates employment. Alternatively, the Company, at its discretion, will provide Executive with a lump sum cash payment equivalent to the cost of continued
medical, dental and life insurance coverage for the remaining term of the Agreement, such amount to be paid within ten (10) calendar days of Executive’s termination date. 

  

	 	iii.	“Good Reason” exists if, without Executive’s express written consent, the Company materially breaches any of its obligations under this Agreement. Without limitation,
such a material breach will occur upon any of the following: 

  

	 	(1)	A material reduction in Executive’s responsibilities or authority in connection with his employment with the Company; 

  

	 	(2)	Assignment to Executive of duties of a non-executive nature or duties for which he is not reasonably equipped by his skills and experience; 

  

	 	(3)	Failure of Executive to be nominated or renominated to the Board to the extent Executive is a Board member prior to the Effective Date; 

  

	 	(4)	A material reduction in salary or benefits contrary to the terms of this Agreement, or, following a Change in Control as defined in Section 11 of this Agreement, any material
reduction in salary or benefits below the amounts Executive was entitled to receive prior to the Change in Control; 

  

	 	(5)	Termination of incentive and benefit plans, programs or arrangements, or reduction of Executive’s participation, that is not applicable to other similarly situated participants
and to such an extent as to materially reduce their aggregate value below their aggregate value as of the Effective Date; 

  

	 	(6)	A requirement that Executive relocate his principal business office or his principal place of residence outside of the area consisting of a thirty-five (35) mile radius from
the current main office and any branch of the Company or the Bank, or the assignment to Executive of duties that would reasonably require such a relocation; or 

  

	 	(7)	Liquidation or dissolution of the Company. 

  

 5 

	 	iv.	Notwithstanding the foregoing, a reduction or elimination of Executive’s benefits under one or more benefit plans, programs or arrangements maintained as part of a good faith,
overall reduction or elimination of such plans or benefits, applicable to all participants in a manner that does not discriminate against Executive (except as such discrimination may be necessary to comply with law), will not constitute an event of
Good Reason or a material breach of this Agreement, provided that benefits of the same type or to the same general extent as those offered under such plans prior to the reduction or elimination are not available to other officers of the Company or
any affiliate under a plan or plans in or under which Executive is not entitled to participate. 

  

	 	g.	Continuing Covenant Not to Compete or Interfere with Relationships. Regardless of anything herein to the contrary, following a termination by the Company or Executive
pursuant to Section 10(e) or 10(f): 

  

	 	i.	Executive’s obligations under Section 9(c) of this Agreement will continue in effect; and 

  

	 	ii.	During the period ending on the first anniversary of such termination, Executive will not serve as an officer, director or employee of any bank holding company, bank, savings
association, savings and loan holding company, mortgage company or other financial institution that offers products or services competing with those offered by the Company, the Bank or their affiliates from any office within thirty-five
(35) miles from the main office or any branch of the Company, the Bank or their affiliates and, further, Executive will not interfere with the relationship of the Company, the Bank or their affiliates and any of their employees, agents, or
representatives. 

  

	 	h.	To the extent Executive is a member of the Board on the date of termination of employment, Executive will resign from the Board immediately following such termination of employment.
Executive will be obligated to tender this resignation regardless of the method or manner of termination, and such resignation will not be conditioned upon any event or payment. 

 11. Termination in Connection with a Change in Control. 
  

	 	a.	For purposes of this Agreement, a “Change in Control” means any of the following events: 

  

	 	i.	Merger: The Company merges into or consolidates with another entity, or merges another corporation into the Company, and as a result, less than a majority of the combined
voting power of the resulting corporation immediately after the merger or consolidation is held by persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately before the merger or consolidation; 

  

	 	ii.	Acquisition of Significant Share Ownership: There is filed, or is required to be filed, a report on Schedule 13D or another form or schedule (other than Schedule 13G)
required under Sections 13(d) or 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, if the schedule discloses that the filing person or persons acting in concert has or have become the beneficial owner of 25% or more of a class of the
Company’s voting securities, but this clause (ii) shall not apply to beneficial ownership of Company voting shares held in a fiduciary capacity by an entity of which the Company directly or indirectly beneficially owns 50% or more of its
outstanding voting securities; 

  

 6 

	 	iii.	Change in Board Composition: During any period of two consecutive years, individuals who constitute the Company’s Board of Directors at the beginning of the two-year
period cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Company’s Board of Directors; provided, however, that for purposes of this clause (iii), each director who is first elected by the board (or first nominated by the board for
election by the members) by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the directors who were directors at the beginning of the two-year period shall be deemed to have also been a director at the beginning of such period; or

  

	 	iv.	Sale of Assets: The Company sells to a third party all or substantially all of its assets. 

  

	 	b.	Termination. If within the period ending one year after a Change in Control, (i) the Company terminates Executive’s employment without Cause, or (ii) Executive
voluntarily terminates his employment With Good Reason, the Company will, within ten calendar days of the termination of Executive’s employment, make a lump-sum cash payment to him equal to three times Executive’s average taxable
compensation (as reported on Form W-2) over the five (5) most recently completed calendar years (or years of employment, annualized for partial years of employment, if less than five), ending with the year immediately preceding the effective
date of the Change in Control. The cash payment made under this Section 11(b) shall be made in lieu of any payment also required under Section 10(f) of this Agreement because of Executive’s termination of employment; however,
Executive’s rights under Section 10(f) are not otherwise affected by this Section 11. Following termination of employment, executive will also continue to participate in any benefit plans of the Company or the Bank that provide
medical, dental and life insurance coverage upon terms no less favorable than the most favorable terms provided to senior executives. If the Company cannot provide such coverage because Executive is no longer an employee, the Company will provide
Executive with comparable coverage on an individual policy basis. The medical, dental and life insurance coverage provided under this Section 11(b) shall cease upon the earlier of: (i) Executive’s death; (ii) Executive’s
employment by another employer other than one of which he is the majority owner; or (iii) thirty-six (36) months after his termination of employment; provided, however, that to the extent required under Section 409A of the Code, and
the regulations issued thereunder, the aggregate payments received for such insurance continuation coverage shall not exceed the applicable dollar limitation under Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code for the year in which Executive terminates
employment. Alternatively, the Company will provide Executive with a lump sum cash payment equivalent to the cost of continued medical, dental and life insurance coverage for thirty-six (36) months, such amount to be paid within ten
(10) calendar days of Executive’s termination date. 

  

	 	c.	The provisions of Section 11 and Sections 13 through 25, including the defined terms used in such sections, shall continue in effect until the later of the expiration of this
Agreement or one year following a Change in Control. 

 12. Indemnification and Liability Insurance. 

 

	 	a.	 Indemnification. The Company agrees to indemnify Executive (and his heirs, executors, and administrators), and to advance expenses related to this
indemnification, to the fullest extent permitted under applicable law and regulations against any and all expenses and liabilities 

  

 7 

	 	 
that Executive reasonably incurs in connection with or arising out of any action, suit, or proceeding in which he may be involved by reason of his service as
an officer or director of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates (whether or not he continues to be an officer or director at the time of incurring any such expenses or liabilities). Covered expenses and liabilities include, but are
not limited to, judgments, court costs, and attorneys’ fees and the costs of reasonable settlements, subject to Board approval, if the action is brought against Executive in his capacity as an officer or director of the Company or any of its
subsidiaries or affiliates. Indemnification for expenses will not extend to matters related to Executive’s termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 12(a) to the contrary, the Company will not be required to provide
indemnification prohibited by applicable law or regulation. The obligations of this Section 12 will survive the term of this Agreement by a period of six (6) years. 

  

	 	b.	Insurance. During the period for which the Company must indemnify Executive, the Company will provide Executive (and his heirs, executors, and administrators) with coverage
under a directors’ and officers’ liability policy, at the Company’s expense, that is at least equivalent to the coverage provided to directors and senior executives of the Company. 

 13. Reimbursement of Executive’s Expenses to Enforce this Agreement. The Company will reimburse Executive for all out-of-pocket
expenses, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by Executive in connection with his successful enforcement of the Company’s obligations under this Agreement. Successful enforcement means the grant of an award
of money or the requirement that the Company take some specified action: (i) as a result of court order; or (ii) otherwise following an initial failure of the Company to pay money or take action promptly following receipt of a written
demand from Executive stating the reason that the Company must make payment or take action under this Agreement. 
 14. Limitation of
Benefits Under Certain Circumstances. If the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11 of this Agreement, either alone or together with other payments and benefits Executive has the right to receive from the Company, would constitute
a “parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Code, the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11 shall be reduced or revised, in the manner determined by Executive, by the amount, if any, which is the minimum necessary to
result in no portion of the payments and benefits under Section 11 being non-deductible to the Company pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Company’s
independent public accountants will determine any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 11; the Company will pay for the accountant’s opinion. If the Company and/or Executive do not agree with the
accountant’s opinion, the Company will pay to Executive the maximum amount of payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11, as selected by Executive, that the opinion indicates have a high probability of not causing any of the payments and
benefits to be non-deductible to the Company and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Company may also request, and Executive has the right to demand that the Company request, a ruling from the IRS as to whether
the disputed payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11 have such tax consequences. The Company will promptly prepare and file the request for a ruling from the IRS, but in no event will the Company make this filing later than thirty
(30) days from the date of the accountant’s opinion referred to above. The request will be subject to Executive’s approval prior to filing; Executive shall not unreasonably withhold his approval. The Company and Executive agree to be
bound by any ruling received from the IRS and to make appropriate payments to each other to reflect any IRS rulings, together with interest at the applicable federal rate provided for in Section 7872(f)(2) of the Code. Nothing contained in this
Agreement shall result in a reduction of any payments or benefits to which Executive may be entitled upon termination of employment other than pursuant to Section 11 hereof, or a reduction in the payments and benefits specified in
Section 11, below zero. 
  

 8 

 15. Injunctive Relief. Upon a breach or threatened breach of Section 10(g) of this
Agreement or the prohibitions upon disclosure contained in Section 9(c) of this Agreement, the parties agree that there is no adequate remedy at law for such breach, and the Company shall be entitled to injunctive relief restraining Executive
from such breach or threatened breach, but such relief shall not be the exclusive remedy for a breach of this Agreement. The parties further agree that Executive, without limitation, may seek injunctive relief to enforce the obligations of the
Company under this Agreement. 
 16. Successors and Assigns. 
  

	 	a.	This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon any corporate or other successor of the Company which shall acquire, directly or indirectly, by merger,
consolidation, purchase or otherwise, all or substantially all of the assets or stock of the Company. 

  

	 	b.	Since the Company is contracting for the unique and personal skills of Executive, Executive shall not assign or delegate his rights or duties under this Agreement without first
obtaining the written consent of the Company. 

 17. No Mitigation. Executive shall not be required to mitigate
the amount of any payment provided for in this Agreement by seeking other employment or otherwise and no such payment shall be offset or reduced by the amount of any compensation or benefits provided to Executive in any subsequent employment.

 18. Notices. All notices, requests, demands and other communications in connection with this Agreement shall be made in
writing and shall be deemed to have been given when delivered by hand or 48 hours after mailing at any general or branch United States Post Office, by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the Company at its principal business
office and to Executive at his home address as maintained in the records of the Company. 
 19. No Plan Created by this Agreement.
Executive and the Company expressly declare and agree that this Agreement was negotiated among them and that no provision or provisions of this Agreement are intended to, or shall be deemed to, create any plan for purposes of the Employee
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”) or any other law or regulation, and each party expressly waives any right to assert the contrary. Any assertion in any judicial or administrative filing, hearing, or process that an ERISA
plan was created by this Agreement shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement by the party making the assertion. 
 20.
Amendments. No amendments or additions to this Agreement shall be binding unless made in writing and signed by all of the parties, except as herein otherwise specifically provided. 
 21. Applicable Law. Except to the extent preempted by federal law, the laws of the State of New Hampshire shall govern this Agreement in
all respects, whether as to its validity, construction, capacity, performance or otherwise. 
 22. Severability. The provisions
of this Agreement shall be deemed severable and the invalidity or unenforceability of any one provision shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the other provisions of this Agreement. 
 23. Headings. Headings contained in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only. 
  

 9 

 24. Entire Agreement. This Agreement, together with any modifications subsequently agreed
to in writing by the parties, shall constitute the entire agreement among the parties with respect to the foregoing subject matter, other than written agreements applicable to specific plans, programs or arrangements described in Sections 5 and 6.

 25. Source of Payments. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, to the extent payments and
benefits, as provided for under this Agreement, are paid or received by Executive under the Employment Agreement in effect between Executive and the Company, the payments and benefits paid by the Company will be subtracted from any amount or benefit
due simultaneously to Executive under similar provisions of this Agreement. Payments will be allocated in proportion to the level of activity and the time expended by Executive on activities related to the Company and the Bank, respectively, as
determined by the Company and the Bank. 
 26. Effect of Code Section 409A. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to
the contrary, if the Company in good faith determines, as of the effective date of Executive’s termination of employment, that amounts payable to Executive hereunder, are required to be suspended or delayed for six months in order to satisfy
the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, then the Company will so advise Executive, and any such payments shall be suspended and accrued for six months, whereupon they shall be paid to Executive in a lump sum (together with interest
thereon at the then-prevailing prime rate). 
  

 10 

 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on
                    , 2007. 
  

							
	ATTEST:	 		 	PROFILE BANCORP, INC.
				
	  
	 		 	By:	 	  

	Witness	 		 		 	For the Entire Board of Directors
			
	WITNESS:	 		 	EXECUTIVE
				
	  
	 		 	By:	 	  

		 		 		 	[Name]

  

 11 

 FORM OF 
 PROFILE BANK, FSB 
 EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT 
 THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), made this      day of
            , 2007, by and between PROFILE BANK, FSB, a federally chartered savings bank (the “Bank”), and [Name] (“Executive”). 
 WHEREAS, Executive serves in a position of substantial responsibility; and 
 WHEREAS, the Bank wishes to assure Executive’s services for the term of this Agreement; and 
 WHEREAS, Executive is willing to serve in the employ of the Bank during the term of this Agreement. 
 NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained in this Agreement, and upon the other terms and conditions provided for in this
Agreement, the parties hereby agree as follows: 
 1. Employment. The Bank will employ Executive as [position]. Executive
will perform all duties and shall have all powers commonly incident to his position, including [position details] or which, consistent with his position, the Board of Directors of the Bank (the “Board”) delegates to Executive.
Executive also agrees to serve, if elected, as an officer and/or director of any subsidiary or affiliate of the Bank and to carry out the duties and responsibilities reasonably appropriate to those offices. 
 2. Location and Facilities. The Bank will furnish Executive with the working facilities and staff customary for executive officers with the
titles and duties set forth in Section 1 and as are necessary for him to perform his duties. The location of such facilities and staff shall be at the principal administrative offices of the Bank, or at such other site or sites customary for
such offices. 
 3. Term. 
  

	 	a.	The term of this Agreement shall include: (i) the initial term, consisting of the period commencing on the date of this Agreement (the “Effective Date”) and ending on
the [third] anniversary of the Effective Date, plus (ii) any and all extensions of the initial term made pursuant to this Section 3. 

  

	 	b.	Commencing on the first anniversary of the Effective Date and continuing on each anniversary of the Effective Date thereafter, the disinterested members of the Board may extend the
Agreement term for an additional year, so that the remaining term of the Agreement again becomes [thirty-six (36)] months, unless Executive elects not to extend the term of this Agreement by giving written notice in accordance with
Section 18 of this Agreement. The Board will review the Agreement and Executive’s performance annually for purposes of determining whether to extend the Agreement term and will include the rationale and results of its review in the minutes
of its meeting. The Board will notify Executive as soon as possible after its annual review whether it has determined to extend the Agreement. 

 4. Base Compensation. 
  

	 	a.	For his services as [position], the Bank agrees to pay Executive an annual base salary at the rate of $[amount] per year, payable in accordance with customary payroll
practices. 

  

	 	b.	During the term of this Agreement, the Board will review the level of Executive’s base salary at least annually, based upon factors deemed relevant, in order to determine
Executive’s base salary through the remaining term of the Agreement. 

 5. Bonuses. Executive will
participate in discretionary bonuses or other incentive compensation programs that the Bank may sponsor for or award from time to time to senior management employees. 
 6. Benefit Plans. Executive will participate in life insurance, medical, dental, pension, profit sharing, retirement and stock-based compensation plans and other programs and arrangements that the Bank
may sponsor or maintain for the benefit of its employees. 
 7. Vacations and Leave. 
  

	 	a.	Executive may take vacations and other leave in accordance with the Bank’s policy for senior executives, or otherwise as approved by the Board. 

  

	 	b.	In addition to paid vacations and other leave, the Board may grant Executive a leave or leaves of absence, with or without pay, at such time or times and upon such terms and
conditions as the Board, in its discretion, may determine. 

 8. Expense Payments and Reimbursements. The Bank
will reimburse Executive for all reasonable out-of-pocket business expenses incurred in connection with his services under this Agreement upon substantiation of such expenses in accordance with applicable policies of the Bank. 
 9. Loyalty and Confidentiality. 
  

	 	a.	During the term of this Agreement, Executive will devote all his business time, attention, skill, and efforts to the faithful performance of his duties under this Agreement;
provided, however, that from time to time, Executive may serve on the boards of directors of, and hold any other offices or positions in, companies or organizations that will not present any conflict of interest with the Bank or any of its
subsidiaries or affiliates, unfavorably affect the performance of Executive’s duties pursuant to this Agreement, or violate any applicable statute or regulation. Executive will not engage in any business or activity contrary to the business
affairs or interests of the Bank or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates. 

  

	 	b.	Nothing contained in this Agreement will prevent or limit Executive’s right to invest in the capital stock or other securities or interests of any business dissimilar from that
of the Bank, or, solely as a passive, minority investor, in any business. 

  

	 	c.	 Executive agrees to maintain the confidentiality of any and all information concerning the operations or financial status of the Bank; the names or addresses of any
of its borrowers, depositors and other customers; any information concerning or obtained from such customers; and any other information concerning the Bank or its subsidiaries or affiliates to which he may be exposed during the course of his
employment. Executive further agrees that, unless required by law or specifically permitted by the Board in writing, he will not disclose to any 

  

 13 

	 	 
person or entity, either during or subsequent to his employment, any of the above-mentioned information which is not generally known to the public, nor will
he use the information in any way other than for the benefit of the Bank. 

 10. Termination and Termination Pay.
Subject to Section 11 of this Agreement, Executive’s employment under this Agreement may be terminated in the following circumstances: 
  

	 	a.	Death. Executive’s employment under this Agreement will terminate upon his death during the term of this Agreement, in which event Executive’s estate will receive
the compensation due to Executive through the last day of the calendar month in which his death occurred. 

  

	 	b.	Retirement. This Agreement will terminate upon Executive’s retirement on or after age 65. 

  

	 	c.	Disability. 

  

	 	i.	The Board or Executive may terminate Executive’s employment after having determined Executive has a Disability. For purposes of this Agreement, “Disability” means a
physical or mental infirmity that impairs Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement and results in Executive becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under any long-term disability plans of the Bank
(or, if no such plans exist, that impairs Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement for a period of one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days). The Board will determine whether or not Executive is and
continues to be permanently disabled for purposes of this Agreement in good faith, based upon competent medical advice and other factors that the Board reasonably believes to be relevant. As a condition to any benefits, the Board may require
Executive to submit to physical or mental evaluations and tests as the Board or its medical experts deem reasonably appropriate. 

  

	 	ii.	In the event of his Disability, Executive will no longer be obligated to perform services under this Agreement. The Bank will pay Executive, as Disability pay, an amount equal to
[one hundred percent (100%)] of Executive’s rate of base salary in effect as of the date of his termination of employment due to Disability. The Bank will make Disability payments on a monthly basis commencing on the first day of the
month following the effective date of Executive’s termination of employment due to Disability and ending on the earlier of: (A) the date he returns to full-time employment at the Bank in the same capacity as he was employed prior to his
termination for Disability; (B) his death; (C) his attainment of age 65; or (D) the date this Agreement would have expired had Executive’s employment not terminated by reason of Disability. The Bank will reduce Disability
payments by the amount of any short- or long-term disability benefits payable to Executive under any other disability programs sponsored by the Bank. In addition, during any period of Executive’s Disability, the Bank will continue to provide
Executive and his dependents, to the greatest extent possible, with continued coverage under all benefit plans (including, without limitation, retirement plans and medical, dental and life insurance plans) in which Executive and/or his dependents
participated prior to his Disability on the same terms as if he remained actively employed by the Bank. 

  

 14 

	 	d.	Termination for Cause. 

  

	 	i.	The Board may, by written notice to Executive in the form and manner specified in this paragraph, immediately terminate his employment at any time for “Cause.” Executive
shall have no right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after termination for Cause, except for already vested benefits. Termination for Cause shall mean termination because of, in the good faith determination of the Board,
Executive’s: 

  

	 	(1)	Personal dishonesty; 

  

	 	(2)	Incompetence; 

  

	 	(3)	Willful misconduct; 

  

	 	(4)	Breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit; 

  

	 	(5)	Intentional failure to perform stated duties; 

  

	 	(6)	Willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order; or 

  

	 	(7)	Material breach of any provision of this Agreement. 

  

	 	ii.	Notwithstanding the foregoing, Executive’s termination for Cause will not become effective unless the Bank has delivered to Executive a copy of a resolution duly adopted by the
affirmative vote of a majority of the entire membership of the Board, at a meeting of the Board called and held for the purpose of finding that, in the good faith opinion of the Board (after reasonable notice to Executive and an opportunity for
Executive to be heard before the Board with counsel), Executive engaged in the conduct described above and specifying the particulars of this conduct. 

  

	 	e.	Voluntary Termination by Executive. In addition to his other rights to terminate under this Agreement, Executive may voluntarily terminate employment during the term of this
Agreement upon at least sixty (60) days prior written notice to the Board. Upon Executive’s voluntary termination, he will receive only his compensation and vested rights and benefits through the date of his termination. Following his
voluntary termination of employment under this Section 10(e), Executive will be subject to the restrictions set forth in Section 10(g) of this Agreement for a period of one (1) year from his termination date. 

 

	 	f.	Without Cause or With Good Reason. 

  

	 	i.	In addition to termination pursuant to Sections 10(a) through 10(e), the Board may, by written notice to Executive, immediately terminate his employment at any time for a reason
other than Cause (a termination “Without Cause”) and Executive may, by written notice to the Board, immediately terminate this Agreement at any time within ninety (90) days following an event constituting “Good Reason,” as
defined below (a termination “With Good Reason”). 

  

 15 

	 	ii.	Subject to Section 11 of this Agreement, in the event of termination under this Section 10(f), Executive will receive his base salary as of his termination date for the
remaining term of the Agreement, with such amount paid in one lump sum within ten (10) calendar days of his termination. Executive will also continue to participate in any benefit plans of the Bank that provide medical, dental and life
insurance coverage for the remaining term of the Agreement, under terms and conditions no less favorable than the most favorable terms and conditions provided to senior executives of the Bank during the same period. If the Bank cannot provide such
coverage because Executive is no longer an employee, the Bank will provide Executive with comparable coverage on an individual policy basis; provided, however, that to the extent required under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986,
as amended (the “Code”), and the regulations issued thereunder, the aggregate payments received for such insurance continuation coverage shall not exceed the applicable dollar limitation under Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code for the
year in which Executive terminates employment. Alternatively, the Bank, at its discretion, will provide Executive with a lump sum cash payment equivalent to the cost of continued medical, dental and life insurance coverage for the remaining term of
the Agreement, such amount to be paid within ten (10) calendar days of Executive’s termination date. 

  

	 	iii.	“Good Reason” exists if, without Executive’s express written consent, the Bank materially breaches any of its obligations under this Agreement. Without limitation,
such a material breach will occur upon any of the following: 

  

	 	(1)	A material reduction in Executive’s responsibilities or authority in connection with his employment with the Bank; 

  

	 	(2)	Assignment to Executive of duties of a non-executive nature or duties for which he is not reasonably equipped by his skills and experience; 

  

	 	(3)	Failure of Executive to be nominated or renominated to the Board to the extent Executive is a Board member prior to the Effective Date; 

  

	 	(4)	A material reduction in salary or benefits contrary to the terms of this Agreement, or, following a Change in Control as defined in Section 11 of this Agreement, any material
reduction in salary or benefits below the amounts Executive was entitled to receive prior to the Change in Control; 

  

	 	(5)	Termination of incentive and benefit plans, programs or arrangements, or reduction of Executive’s participation, that is not applicable to other similarly situated participants
and to such an extent as to materially reduce their aggregate value below their aggregate value as of the Effective Date; 

  

	 	(6)	A requirement that Executive relocate his principal business office or his principal place of residence outside of the area consisting of a thirty-five (35) mile radius from
the current main office and any branch of the Bank, or the assignment to Executive of duties that would reasonably require such a relocation; or 

  

	 	(7)	Liquidation or dissolution of the Bank. 

  

 16 

	 	iv.	Notwithstanding the foregoing, a reduction or elimination of Executive’s benefits under one or more benefit plans, programs or arrangements maintained by the Bank as part of a
good faith, overall reduction or elimination of such plans or benefits, applicable to all participants in a manner that does not discriminate against Executive (except as such discrimination may be necessary to comply with law), will not constitute
an event of Good Reason or a material breach of this Agreement, provided that benefits of the same type or to the same general extent as those offered under such plans prior to the reduction or elimination are not available to other officers of the
Bank or any affiliate under a plan or plans in or under which Executive is not entitled to participate. 

  

	 	g.	Continuing Covenant Not to Compete or Interfere with Relationships. Regardless of anything herein to the contrary, following a termination by the Bank or Executive pursuant
to Section 10(e) or 10(f): 

  

	 	i.	Executive’s obligations under Section 9(c) of this Agreement will continue in effect; and 

  

	 	ii.	During the period ending on the first anniversary of such termination, Executive will not serve as an officer, director or employee of any bank holding company, bank, savings
association, savings and loan holding company, mortgage company or other financial institution that offers products or services competing with those offered by the Bank from any office within thirty-five (35) miles from the main office or any
branch of the Bank and, further, Executive will not interfere with the relationship of the Bank, its subsidiaries or affiliates and any of their employees, agents, or representatives. 

  

	 	h.	To the extent Executive is a member of the Board on the date of termination of employment with the Bank, Executive will resign from the Board immediately following such termination
of employment with the Bank. Executive will be obligated to tender this resignation regardless of the method or manner of termination, and such resignation will not be conditioned upon any event or payment. 

 11. Termination in Connection with a Change in Control. 
  

	 	a.	For purposes of this Agreement, a “Change in Control” means any of the following events: 

  

	 	i.	Merger: Profile Bancorp, Inc. (the “Company”) merges into or consolidates with another entity, or merges another corporation into the Company, and as a result, less
than a majority of the combined voting power of the resulting corporation immediately after the merger or consolidation is held by persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately before the merger or consolidation; 

 

	 	ii.	Acquisition of Significant Share Ownership: There is filed, or is required to be filed, a report on Schedule 13D or another form or schedule (other than Schedule 13G)
required under Sections 13(d) or 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, if the schedule discloses that the filing person or persons acting in concert has or have become the beneficial owner of 25% or more of a class of the
Company’s voting securities, but this clause (ii) shall not apply to beneficial ownership of Company voting shares held in a fiduciary capacity by an entity of which the Company directly or indirectly beneficially owns 50% or more of its
outstanding voting securities; 

  

 17 

	 	iii.	Change in Board Composition: During any period of two consecutive years, individuals who constitute the Company’s Board of Directors at the beginning of the two-year
period cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Company’s Board of Directors; provided, however, that for purposes of this clause (iii), each director who is first elected by the board (or first nominated by the board for
election by the members) by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the directors who were directors at the beginning of the two-year period shall be deemed to have also been a director at the beginning of such period; or

  

	 	iv.	Sale of Assets: The Company or the Bank sells to a third party all or substantially all of its assets. 

  

	 	b.	Termination. If within the period ending one year after a Change in Control, (i) the Bank terminates Executive’s employment without Cause, or (ii) Executive
voluntarily terminates his employment With Good Reason, the Bank will, within ten calendar days of the termination of Executive’s employment, make a lump-sum cash payment to him equal to three times Executive’s average taxable compensation
(as reported on Form W-2) over the five (5) most recently completed calendar years (or years of employment, annualized for partial years of employment, if less than five), ending with the year immediately preceding the effective date of the
Change in Control. The cash payment made under this Section 11(b) shall be made in lieu of any payment also required under Section 10(f) of this Agreement because of Executive’s termination of employment; however, Executive’s
rights under Section 10(f) are not otherwise affected by this Section 11. Following termination of employment, executive will also continue to participate in any benefit plans of the Bank that provide medical, dental and life insurance
coverage upon terms no less favorable than the most favorable terms provided to senior executives or, if the Bank cannot provide such coverage because Executive is no longer an employee, the Bank will provide Executive with comparable coverage on an
individual policy basis. The medical, dental and life insurance coverage provided under this Section 11(b) shall cease upon the earlier of: (i) Executive’s death; (ii) Executive’s employment by another employer other than
one of which he is the majority owner; or (iii) thirty-six (36) months after his termination of employment; provided, however, that to the extent required under Section 409A of the Code, and the regulations issued thereunder, the
aggregate payments received for such insurance continuation coverage shall not exceed the applicable dollar limitation under Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code for the year in which Executive terminates employment. Alternatively, the Bank will
provide Executive with a lump sum cash payment equivalent to the cost of continued medical, dental and life insurance coverage for thirty-six (36) months, such amount to be paid within ten (10) calendar days of Executive’s termination
date. 

  

	 	c.	The provisions of Section 11 and Sections 13 through 25, including the defined terms used in such sections, shall continue in effect until the later of the expiration of this
Agreement or one year following a Change in Control. 

 12. Indemnification and Liability Insurance. 

 

	 	a.	 Indemnification. The Bank agrees to indemnify Executive (and his heirs, executors, and administrators), and to advance expenses related to this
indemnification, to the fullest extent 

  

 18 

	 	 
permitted under applicable law and regulations against any and all expenses and liabilities that Executive reasonably incurs in connection with or arising
out of any action, suit, or proceeding in which he may be involved by reason of his service as an officer or director of the Bank or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates (whether or not he continues to be an officer or director at the time of
incurring any such expenses or liabilities). Covered expenses and liabilities include, but are not limited to, judgments, court costs, and attorneys’ fees and the costs of reasonable settlements, subject to Board approval, if the action is
brought against Executive in his capacity as an officer or director of the Bank or any of its subsidiaries. Indemnification for expenses will not extend to matters related to Executive’s termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this
Section 12(a) to the contrary, the Bank will not be required to provide indemnification prohibited by applicable law or regulation. The obligations of this Section 12 will survive the term of this Agreement by a period of six
(6) years. 

  

	 	b.	Insurance. During the period for which the Bank must indemnify Executive, the Bank will provide Executive (and his heirs, executors, and administrators) with coverage under a
directors’ and officers’ liability policy at the Bank’s expense, that is at least equivalent to the coverage provided to directors and senior executives of the Bank. 

 13. Reimbursement of Executive’s Expenses to Enforce this Agreement. The Bank will reimburse Executive for all out-of-pocket expenses,
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by Executive in connection with his successful enforcement of the Bank’s obligations under this Agreement. Successful enforcement means the grant of an award of money or
the requirement that the Bank take some specified action: (i) as a result of court order; or (ii) otherwise following an initial failure of the Bank to pay money or take action promptly following receipt of a written demand from Executive
stating the reason that the Bank must make payment or take action under this Agreement. 
 14. Limitation of Benefits Under Certain
Circumstances. If the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11 of this Agreement, either alone or together with other payments and benefits Executive has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a “parachute
payment” under Section 280G of the Code, the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11 shall be reduced or revised, in the manner determined by Executive, by the amount, if any, which is the minimum necessary to result in no
portion of the payments and benefits under Section 11 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Bank’s independent public
accountants will determine any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 11; the Bank will pay for the accountant’s opinion. If the Bank and/or Executive do not agree with the accountant’s opinion, the Bank
will pay to Executive the maximum amount of payments and benefits pursuant to Section 11, as selected by Executive, that the opinion indicates have a high probability of not causing any of the payments and benefits to be non-deductible to the
Bank and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Bank may also request, and Executive has the right to demand that the Bank request, a ruling from the IRS as to whether the disputed payments and benefits pursuant
to Section 11 have such tax consequences. The Bank will promptly prepare and file the request for a ruling from the IRS, but in no event will the Bank make this filing later than thirty (30) days from the date of the accountant’s
opinion referred to above. The request will be subject to Executive’s approval prior to filing; Executive shall not unreasonably withhold his approval. The Bank and Executive agree to be bound by any ruling received from the IRS and to make
appropriate payments to each other to reflect any IRS rulings, together with interest at the applicable federal rate provided for in Section 7872(f)(2) of the Code. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall result in a reduction of any payments
or benefits to which Executive may be entitled upon termination of employment other than pursuant to Section 11 hereof, or a reduction in the payments and benefits specified in Section 11, below zero. 
  

 19 

 15. Injunctive Relief. Upon a breach or threatened breach of Section 10(g) of this
Agreement or the prohibitions upon disclosure contained in Section 9(c) of this Agreement, the parties agree that there is no adequate remedy at law for such breach, and the Bank shall be entitled to injunctive relief restraining Executive from
such breach or threatened breach, but such relief shall not be the exclusive remedy for a breach of this Agreement. The parties further agree that Executive, without limitation, may seek injunctive relief to enforce the obligations of the Bank under
this Agreement. 
 16. Successors and Assigns. 
  

	 	a.	This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon any corporate or other successor of the Bank which shall acquire, directly or indirectly, by merger, consolidation,
purchase or otherwise, all or substantially all of the assets or stock of the Bank. 

  

	 	b.	Since the Bank is contracting for the unique and personal skills of Executive, Executive shall not assign or delegate his rights or duties under this Agreement without first
obtaining the written consent of the Bank. 

 17. No Mitigation. Executive shall not be required to mitigate the
amount of any payment provided for in this Agreement by seeking other employment or otherwise and no such payment shall be offset or reduced by the amount of any compensation or benefits provided to Executive in any subsequent employment.

 18. Notices. All notices, requests, demands and other communications in connection with this Agreement shall be made in
writing and shall be deemed to have been given when delivered by hand or 48 hours after mailing at any general or branch United States Post Office, by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the Bank at its principal business
office and to Executive at his home address as maintained in the records of the Bank. 
 19. No Plan Created by this Agreement.
Executive and the Bank expressly declare and agree that this Agreement was negotiated among them and that no provision or provisions of this Agreement are intended to, or shall be deemed to, create any plan for purposes of the Employee
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”) or any other law or regulation, and each party expressly waives any right to assert the contrary. Any assertion in any judicial or administrative filing, hearing, or process that an ERISA
plan was created by this Agreement shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement by the party making the assertion. 
 20.
Amendments. No amendments or additions to this Agreement shall be binding unless made in writing and signed by all of the parties, except as herein otherwise specifically provided. 
 21. Applicable Law. Except to the extent preempted by federal law, the laws of the State of New Hampshire shall govern this Agreement in
all respects, whether as to its validity, construction, capacity, performance or otherwise. 
 22. Severability. The provisions
of this Agreement shall be deemed severable and the invalidity or unenforceability of any one provision shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the other provisions of this Agreement. 
 23. Headings. Headings contained in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only. 
  

 20 

 24. Entire Agreement. This Agreement, together with any modifications subsequently agreed
to in writing by the parties, shall constitute the entire agreement among the parties with respect to the foregoing subject matter, other than written agreements applicable to specific plans, programs or arrangements described in Sections 5 and 6.

 25. Required Provisions. In the event any of the foregoing provisions of this Agreement conflict with the terms of this
Section 25, this Section 25 shall prevail. 
  

	 	a.	The Bank’s Board of Directors may terminate Executive’s employment at any time, but any termination by the Bank, other than termination for Cause, shall not prejudice
Executive’s right to compensation or other benefits under this Agreement. Executive shall not have the right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after termination for Cause as defined in Section 10(d) of this
Agreement. 

  

	 	b.	If Executive is suspended from office and/or temporarily prohibited from participating in the conduct of the Bank’s affairs by a notice served under Section 8(e)(3) or
8(g)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 1818(e)(3) or (g)(1), the Bank’s obligations under this Agreement shall be suspended as of the date of service, unless stayed by appropriate proceedings. If the charges in the
notice are dismissed, the Bank may, in its discretion: (i) pay Executive all or part of the compensation withheld while its contract obligations were suspended; and (ii) reinstate (in whole or in part) any of the obligations which were
suspended. 

  

	 	c.	If Executive is removed and/or permanently prohibited from participating in the conduct of the Bank’s affairs by an order issued under Section 8(e)(4) or 8(g)(1) of the
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 1818(e)(4) or (g)(1), all obligations of the Bank under this Agreement shall terminate as of the effective date of the order, but vested rights of the contracting parties shall not be affected.

  

	 	d.	If the Bank is in default as defined in Section 3(x)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 1813(x)(1), all obligations under this Agreement shall
terminate as of the date of default, but this paragraph shall not affect any vested rights of the contracting parties. 

  

	 	e.	All obligations under this Agreement shall terminate, except to the extent determined that continuation of the Agreement is necessary for the continued operation of the institution:
(i) by the Director of the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS), or his designee, at the time the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) enters into an agreement to provide assistance to or on behalf of the Bank under the authority
contained in Section 13(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 1823(c), or (ii) by the Director of the OTS (or his designee) at the time the Director (or his designee) approves a supervisory merger to resolve
problems related to the operations of the Bank or when the Bank is determined by the Director to be in an unsafe or unsound condition. Any rights of the parties that have already vested, however, shall not be affected by such action.

  

	 	f.	Any payments made to Executive pursuant to this Agreement, or otherwise, are subject to and conditioned upon their compliance with 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) and FDIC Regulation
12 C.F.R. Part 359, Golden Parachute and Indemnification Payments. 

 26. Effect of Code Section 409A.
Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, if the Bank in good faith determines, as of the effective date of Executive’s termination of employment, that 

  

 21 

 
amounts payable to Executive hereunder, are required to be suspended or delayed for six months in order to satisfy the requirements of Section 409A of
the Code, then the Bank will so advise Executive, and any such payments shall be suspended and accrued for six months, whereupon they shall be paid to Executive in a lump sum (together with interest thereon at the then-prevailing prime rate).

  

 22 

 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on [date]. 

 

							
	ATTEST:	 		 	PROFILE BANK, FSB
				
	  
	 		 	By:	 	  

	Witness	 		 		 	For the Entire Board of Directors
			
	WITNESS:	 		 	EXECUTIVE
				
	  
	 		 	By:	 	  

		 		 		 	[Name]

  

 23

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00129-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00129-of-00352.parquet"}]]